Texas Instruments Computer Hardware TMS320DM355 User Manual

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

1 TMS320DM355 Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

1.1 Features

encoder

•

High-Performance Digital Media

System-on-Chip

•

External Memory Interfaces (EMIFs)

–

216- and 270-MHz ARM926EJ-S Clock Rate

Fully Software-Compatible With ARM9

–

DDR2 and mDDR SDRAM 16-bit wide EMIF

With 256 MByte Address Space (1.8-V I/O)

Asynchronous16-/8-bit Wide EMIF (AEMIF)

–

•

ARM926EJ-S Core

–

•

Flash Memory Interfaces

Support for 32-Bit and 16-Bit (Thumb Mode)

Instruction Sets

DSP Instruction Extensions and Single

Cycle MAC

ARM Jazelle Technology

EmbeddedICE-RT Logic for Real-Time

Debug

–

NAND (8-/16-bit Wide Data)

OneNAND(16-bit Wide Data)

–

•

Flash Card Interfaces

–

Two Multimedia Card (MMC) / Secure

Digital (SD/SDIO)

SmartMedia

–

•

ARM9 Memory Architecture

•

Enhanced Direct-Memory-Access (EDMA)

Controller (64 Independent Channels)

USB Port with Integrated 2.0 High-Speed PHY

that Supports

–

16K-Byte Instruction Cache

8K-Byte Data Cache

32K-Byte RAM

8K-Byte ROM

Little Endian

–

USB 2.0 Full and High-Speed Device

USB 2.0 Low, Full, and High-Speed Host

•

Three 64-Bit General-Purpose Timers (each

configurable as two 32-bit timers)

One 64-Bit Watch Dog Timer

Three UARTs (One fast UART with RTS and

CTS Flow Control)

Three Serial Port Interfaces (SPI) each with

two Chip-Selects

One Master/Slave Inter-Integrated Circuit

(I²C) Bus™

Two Audio Serial Port (ASP)

Video Processing Subsystem

– Front End Provides:

•

Hardware IPIPE for Real-Time Image

Processing

•

CCD and CMOS Imager Interface

14-Bit Parallel AFE (Analog Front End)

Interface Up to 67.5 MHz

•

Glueless Interface to Common Video

Decoders

BT.601/BT.656 Digital YCbCr 4:2:2

(8-/16-Bit) Interface

–

I2S and TDM I2S

AC97 Audio Codec Interface

S/PDIF via Software

Standard Voice Codec Interface (AIC12)

SPI Protocol (Master Mode Only)

•

Histogram Module

Resize Engine

–

Resize Images From 1/16x to 8x

Separate Horizontal/Vertical Control

Two Simultaneous Output Paths

•

Four Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Outputs

Four RTO (Real Time Out) Outputs

Up to 104 General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) Pins

(Multiplexed with Other Device Functions)

On-Chip ARM ROM Bootloader (RBL) to Boot

From NAND Flash, MMC/SD, or UART

Configurable Power-Saving Modes

Crystal or External Clock Input (typically

24 MHz or 36 MHz)

Flexible PLL Clock Generators

Debug Interface Support

–

Back End Provides:

•

Hardware On-Screen Display (OSD)

Composite NTSC/PAL video encoder

output

•

8-/16-bit YCC and Up to 18-Bit RGB666

Digital Output

BT.601/BT.656 Digital YCbCr 4:2:2

(8-/16-Bit) Interface

Supports digital HDTV (720p/1080i)

output for connection to external

•

Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas

Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this document.

I²C-bus is a trademark of Texas Instruments.

Windows is a trademark of Microsoft.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

PRODUCT PREVIEW information concerns products in the

formative or design phase of development. Characteristic data and

other specifications are design goals. Texas Instruments reserves

the right to change or discontinue these products without notice.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

1.2 Description

The DM355 is a highly integrated, programmable platform for digital still camera, digital photo frames, IP

security cameras, 4-channel digital video recorders, video door bell application, and other low cost

portable digital video applications. Designed to offer portable video designers and manufacturers the

ability to produce affordable portable digital video solutions with high picture quality, the DM355 combines

high performance, high quality, low power consumption at a very low price point. The DM355 also enables

seamless interface to most additional external devices required for a complete digital camera

implementation. The interface is flexible enough to support various types of CCD and CMOS sensors,

signal conditioning circuits, power management, DDR/mDDR memory, SRAM, NAND, shutter, Iris and

auto-focus motor controls, etc.

The processor core is an ARM926EJ-S RISC processor. The ARM926EJ-S is a 32-bit processor core that

performs 32-bit and 16-bit instructions and processes 32-bit, 16-bit, and 8-bit data. The core uses

pipelining so that all parts of the processor and memory system can operate continuously. The ARM core

incorporates:

•

A coprocessor 15 (CP15) and protection module

Data and program Memory Management Units (MMUs) with table look-aside buffers.

Separate 16K-byte instruction and 8K-byte data caches. Both are four-way associative with virtual

index virtual tag (VIVT).

DM355 performance is enhanced by its MPEG/JPEG co-processor. The MPEG/JPEG co-processor

performs the computational operations required for image processing; JPEG compression and MPEG1,2,4

video and imaging standards.

The device has a Video Processing Subsystem (VPSS) with two configurable video/imaging peripherals:

•

A Video Processing Front-End (VPFE)

A Video Processing Back-End (VPBE)

The VPFE port provides an interface for CCD/CMOS imager modules and video decoders. The VPBE

provides hardware On Screen Display (OSD) support and composite NTSC/PAL and digital LCD output.

The DM355 peripheral set includes:

•

An inter-integrated circuit (I2C) Bus interface

Two audio serial ports (ASP)

Three 64-bit general-purpose timers each configurable as two independent 32-bit timers

A 64-bit watchdog timer

Up to 104-pins of general-purpose input/output (GPIO) with programmable interrupt/event generation

modes, multiplexed with other peripherals

•

Three UARTs with hardware handshaking support on one UART

Three serial port Interfaces (SPI)

Four pulse width modulator (PWM) peripherals

Four real time out (RTO) outputs

Two Multi-Media Card / Secure Digital (MMC/SD) interfaces

A USB 2.0 full and high-speed device and host interface

Two external memory interfaces:

–

An asynchronous external memory interface (AEMIF) for slower memories/peripherals such as

NAND and OneNAND,

–

A high speed synchronous memory interface for DDR2/mDDR.

For software development support the has a complete set of ARM development tools which include: C

compilers, assembly optimizers to simplify programming and scheduling, and a Windows™ debugger

interface for visibility into source code execution.

Submit Documentation Feedback

TMS320DM355 Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

1.3 Functional Block Diagram

Figure 1-1 shows the functional block diagram of the DM355 device.

CCD/

CMOS

Module

CCDC

IPIP

IPIPE

LD/CM

LD /

Enhanced

DDR

controller

VPFE

Enhanced DMA

64 channels

3PCC /TC

DLL/

PHY

16 bit

DDR2/MDDR 16

channels

10b

DAC

Composite video

Digital RGB/YUV

Vide

Video

Encod

Encoder

(100 MHz

OSD

z )

VPBE

VPSS

DMA /Data and configuration bus

DMA/Data and configuration bus

USB 2.0

USB2.0 PHY

ARM

ARM INTC

NaNnadn/SdM//

Async/One Nand

(EMIF2.3)

Enhanced

MPEG/JPEG

Coprocessor

channels

3PCC /TC

ARM

ARM926EJ-S_Z8

Speaker

microphone

ASP (2x)

MMC/SD (x2)

SPI I/F (x3)

UART (x3)

I2C

(100 MHz

z )

cach

l-cache

16KKB

RAM

I-

32KB

32 K

cBach

D-cache

ROM

D-

8KB

8 K

8KB

Timer/

WDT (x4 - 64)

GIO

PWM (x4)

RTO

Clocks

JTA

JTAG

I/F

CLOCK

CLOCK ctrl

64bit DMA/Data Bus

Peripherals

PLLs

32bit Configuration Bus

JTAG 24 MHz

27 MHz

(optional)

Figure 1-1. Functional Block Diagram

TMS320DM355 Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Contents

TMS320DM355 Digital Media System-on-Chip

4.2 Recommended Operating Conditions............... 92

(DMSoC) ................................................... 1

1.1 Features .............................................. 1

1.2 Description............................................ 3

1.3 Functional Block Diagram ............................ 4

Device Overview ......................................... 6

2.1 Device Characteristics................................ 6

2.2 Memory Map Summary............................... 7

2.3 Pin Assignments...................................... 9

2.4 Pin Functions........................................ 13

2.5 Pin List .............................................. 36

2.6 Device Support ...................................... 55

Detailed Device Description.......................... 59

3.1 ARM Subsystem Overview.......................... 59

3.2 ARM926EJ-S RISC CPU............................ 60

3.3 Memory Mapping.................................... 62

3.4 ARM Interrupt Controller (AINTC)................... 63

3.5 Device Clocking ..................................... 65

3.6 PLL Controller (PLLC)............................... 73

3.7 Power and Sleep Controller (PSC).................. 77

3.8 System Control Module ............................. 77

3.9 Pin Multiplexing...................................... 78

3.10 Device Reset ........................................ 79

3.11 Default Device Configurations....................... 80

3.12 Device Boot Modes ................................. 83

3.13 Power Management................................. 85

3.14 64-Bit Crossbar Architecture ........................ 87

3.15 MPEG/JPEG Overview.............................. 90

Device Operating Conditions ........................ 91

4.3

Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended

Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Case

Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted) ............ 93

Peripheral Information and Electrical

Specifications ........................................... 94

5.1

Parameter Information Device-Specific Information 94

Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition

Behavior ............................................. 96

5.2

5.3 Power Supplies...................................... 96

5.4 Reset ................................................ 98

5.5 Oscillators and Clocks............................... 99

5.6

General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)............. 104

5.7 External Memory Interface (EMIF)................. 106

5.8 MMC/SD ........................................... 113

5.9

Video Processing Sub-System (VPSS) Overview . 115

5.10 USB 2.0 ............................................ 127

5.11 Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter

(UART) ............................................. 129

5.12 Serial Port Interface (SPI).......................... 131

5.13 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) ....................... 134

5.14 Audio Serial Port (ASP)............................ 137

5.15 Timer............................................... 144

5.16 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)..................... 145

5.17 Real Time Out (RTO) .............................. 147

5.18 IEEE 1149.1 JTAG ................................ 148

Revision History ...................................... 151

Mechanical Data....................................... 153

7.1 Thermal Data for ZCE ............................. 153

7.1.1 Packaging Information............................. 153

4.1

Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating Case

Temperature Range

(Unless Otherwise Noted) .......................... 91

Submit Documentation Feedback

Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

2 Device Overview

2.1 Device Characteristics

Table 2-1 provides an overview of the DMSoC. The table shows significant features of the device,

including the peripherals, capacity of on-chip RAM, ARM operating frequency, the package type with pin

count, etc.

Table 2-1. Characteristics of the Processor

HARDWARE FEATURES

DM355

DDR2 / mDDR Memory Controller

DDR2 / mDDR (16-bit bus width)

Asynchronous (8/16-bit bus width)

RAM, Flash (NAND, OneNAND)

Asynchronous EMIF (AEMIF)

Flash Card Interfaces

EDMA

Two MMC/SD

One SmartMedia/xD

64 independent DMA channels

Eight EDMA channels

Three 64-Bit General Purpose (each

configurable as two separate 32-bit

timers)

Timers

Peripherals

One 64-Bit Watch Dog

Not all peripherals pins are

available at the same time

(For more detail, see the

Device Configuration

section).

Three (one with RTS and CTS flow

control)

UART

SPI

Three (each supports two slave

devices)

I²C

One (Master/Slave)

Two ASP

Audio Serial Port [ASP]

General-Purpose Input/Output Port

Pulse width modulator (PWM)

Up to 104

Four outputs

One Input (VPFE)

One Output (VPBE)

Configurable Video Ports

USB 2.0

High, Full Speed Device

High, Full, Low Speed Host

ARM

On-Chip CPU Memory

JTAG BSDL_ID

Organization

16-KB I-cache, 8-KB D-cache,

32-KB RAM, 8-KB ROM

JTAGID register (address location: 0x01C4 0028)

0x0B73B01F

ARM 216 MHz and 270 MHz

1.3 V

CPU Frequency (Maximum) MHz

Core (V)

Voltage

I/O (V)

3.3 V, 1.8 V

Reference frequency options

Configurable PLL controller

24 MHz (typical), 36 MHz

PLL bypass, programmable PLL

PLL Options

BGA Package

13 x 13 mm

337-Pin BGA (ZCE)

90 nm

Process Technology

Product Preview (PP),

Advance Information (AI),

or Production Data (PD)

Product Status⁽¹⁾

(1) PRODUCT PREVIEW information concerns products in the formative or design phase of development. Characteristic data and other

specifications are design goals. Texas Instruments reserves the right to change or discontinue these products without notice.

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

2.2 Memory Map Summary

Table 2-3 shows the memory map address ranges of the device. Table 2-3 depicts the expanded map of

the Configuration Space (0x01C0 0000 through 0x01FF FFFF). The device has multiple on-chip memories

associated with its processor and various subsystems. To help simplify software development a unified

memory map is used where possible to maintain a consistent view of device resources across all bus

masters. The bus masters are the ARM, EDMA, USB, and VPSS.

Table 2-2. DM355 Memory Map

Start Address

0x0000 0000

0x0000 4000

0x0000 8000

End Address

0x0000 3FFF

0x0000 7FFF

0x0000 FFFF

Size (Bytes)

ARM

Mem Map

EDMA

Mem Map

USB

Mem Map

VPSS

Mem Map

16K

ARM RAM0

(Instruction)

16K

ARM RAM1

(Instruction)

Reserved

32K

ARM ROM

(Instruction)

- only 8K used

0x0001 0000

0x0001 4000

0x0001 8000

0x0001 3FFF

0x0001 7FFF

0x0001 FFFF

16K

32K

ARM RAM0 (Data)

ARM RAM1 (Data)

ARM RAM0

ARM RAM1

ARM ROM

ARM RAM0

ARM RAM1

ARM ROM

ARM ROM (Data)

- only 8K used

0x0002 0000

0x0010 0000

0x01BC 0000

0x01BC 1000

0x01BC 1800

0x01BC 1900

0x01BD 0000

0x01C0 0000

0x000F FFFF

0x01BB FFFF

0x01BC 0FFF

0x01BC 17FF

0x01BC 18FF

0x01BC FFFF

0x01BF FFFF

0x01FF FFFF

896K

26M

Reserved

ARM ETB Mem

ARM ETB Reg

ARM IceCrusher

Reserved

256

Reserved

59136

192K

CFG Bus

Peripherals

CFG Bus

Peripherals

Reserved

0x0200 0000

0x0A00 0000

0x11F0 0000

0x11F2 0000

0x2000 0000

0x09FF FFFF

0x11EF FFFF

0x11F1 FFFF

0x1FFF FFFF

0x2000 7FFF

128M

127M - 16K

128K

ASYNC EMIF (Data) ASYNC EMIF (Data)

Reserved

141M-64K

32K

DDR EMIF Control

Regs

DDR EMIF Control

Regs

0x2000 8000

0x4200 0000

0x4A00 0000

0x8000 0000

0x9000 0000

0x41FF FFFF

0x49FF FFFF

0x7FFF FFFF

0x8FFF FFFF

0xFFFF FFFF

544M-32K

128M

Reserved

AEMIF - shadow

Reserved

864M

256M

DDR EMIF

Reserved

DDR EMIF

Reserved

DDR EMIF

Reserved

1792M

Reserved

Table 2-3. DM355 ARM Configuration Bus Access to Peripherals

Address

Accessibility

Region

Start

End

Size

64K

ARM

√

EDMA

√

EDMA CC

EDMA TC0

EDMA TC1

Reserved

UART0

0x01C0 0000

0x01C1 0000

0x01C1 0400

0x01C1 8800

0x01C1 A000

0x01C2 0000

0x01C0 FFFF

0x01C1 03FF

0x01C1 07FF

0x01C1 9FFF

0x01C1 FFFF

0x01C2 03FF

√

24K

√

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-3. DM355 ARM Configuration Bus Access to Peripherals (continued)

Address

0x01C2 07FF

Accessibility

UART1

Timer4/5

0x01C2 0400

0x01C2 0800

0x01C2 0C00

0x01C2 1000

0x01C2 1400

0x01C2 1800

0x01C2 1C00

0x01C2 2000

0x01C2 2400

0x01C2 2800

0x01C2 2C00

0x01C4 0000

0x01C4 0800

0x01C4 0C00

0x01C4 1000

0x01C4 8000

0x01C6 4000

0x01C6 6000

0x01C6 6800

0x01C6 7000

0x01C6 7800

0x01C7 0000

0x01C7 0080

0x01C7 0100

0x01C7 0200

0x01C7 0300

0x01C7 0400

0x01C7 0600

0x01C7 0800

0x01C7 0900

0x01C7 1000

0x01CC 0000

0x01E0 0000

0x01E0 2000

0x01E0 4000

0x01E0 6000

0x01E0 6400

0x01E1 0000

0x01E1 1000

0x01E2 0000

0x0200 0000

0x0400 0000

0x0A00 0000

0x0C00 0000

√

0x01C2 0BFF

0x01C2 0FFF

0x01C2 13FF

0x01C2 17FF

0x01C2 1BFF

0x01C2 1FFF

0x01C2 23FF

0x01C2 27FF

0x01C2 2BFF

0x01C2 2FFF

0x01C4 07FF

0x01C4 0BFF

0x01C4 0FFF

0x01C4 1FFF

0x01C4 83FF

0x01C6 5FFF

0x01C6 67FF

0x01C6 6FFF

0x01C6 77FF

0x01C6 FFFF

0x01C7 FFFF

0x01C7 007F

0x01C7 00FF

0x01C7 01FF

0x01C7 02FF

0x01C7 03FF

0x01C7 05FF

0x01C7 07FF

0x01C7 08FF

0x01C7 09FF

0x01C7 3FFF

0x01CD FFFF

0x01E0 1FFF

0x01E0 3FFF

0x01E0 5FFF

0x01E0 63FF

0x01E0 FFFF

0x01E1 0FFF

0x01E1 FFFF

0x01FF FFFF

0x03FF FFFF

0x05FF FFFF

0x0BFF FFFF

0x0FFF FFFF

Real-time out

I2C

Timer0/1

Timer2/3

WatchDog Timer

PWM0

PWM1

PWM2

PWM3

System Module

PLL Controller 0

PLL Controller 1

Power/Sleep Controller

ARM Interrupt Controller

USB OTG 2.0 Regs / RAM

SPI0

SPI1

GPIO

SPI2

VPSS Subsystem

VPSS Clock Control

Hardware 3A

Image Pipe (IPIPE) Interface

On Screen Display

High Speed Serial IF

Video Encoder

CCD Controller

VPSS Buffer Logic

Reserved

64K

128

256

512

256

12K

128K

Image Pipe (IPIPE)

Reserved

Multimedia / SD 1

ASP0

ASP1

UART2

Reserved

39K

ASYNC EMIF Control

Multimedia / SD 0

Reserved

60K

1792K

32M

64M

ASYNC EMIF Data (CE0)

ASYNC EMIF Data (CE1)

Reserved

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

2.3 Pin Assignments

Extensive use of pin multiplexing is used to accommodate the largest number of peripheral functions in

the smallest possible package. Pin multiplexing is controlled using a combination of hardware

configuration at device reset and software programmable register settings.

2.3.1 Pin Map (Bottom View)

Figure 2-1 through Figure 2-4 show the pin assignments in four quadrants (A, B, C, and D). Note that

micro-vias are not required. Contact your TI representative for routing recommendations.

CIN0

VCLK

CIN3

CIN2

VREF

DDA33_USB

SSA_PLL2

RSV01

LCD_OE

FIELD

DDA13_USB

DDA_PLL2

VFB

TVOUT

IOUT

EXTCLK

COUT1

COUT3

COUT4

YOUT7

YOUT4

VSYNC

HSYNC

IBIAS

COUT0

COUT2

DD_VOUT

EMU0

TMS

DD_VOUT

USB_VBUS

EMU1

TDO

TDI

SS_USB

COUT6

COUT7

YOUT3

USB_ID

USB_DRV

VBUS

SS_USB_REF

USB_R1

COUT5

YOUT0

DDD13_USB

TRST

MXO1

DDA33_USB_

PLL

SS_USB

YOUT5

YOUT1

YOUT2

YOUT6

USB_DM

USB_DP

MXI1

Figure 2-1. Pin Map [Quadrant A]

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

DDR_A02

DDR_A03

DDR_A05

DDR_A08

DDR_A09

DDR_A11

DDR_CLK

DDR_BA[2]

DDR_BA[0]

DDR_CS

DDR_CAS

DDR_A00

DDR_A01

DDR_A04

DDR_A07

DDR_A06

DDR_A10

DDR_A13

DDR_RAS

DDR_A12

DDR_BA[1]

MXO2

MXI2

PCLK

YIN3

YIN4

CIN7

CIN5

CIN1

DDR_ZN

CAM_VD

CAM_WEN_

FIELD

DD_DDR

YIN1

YIN2

YIN0

CAM_HD

YIN5

DD_VIN

DD_DDR

SS_MX2

RSV05

RSV06

RSV04

RSV03

RSV02

YIN6

CIN4

DD_DDR

YIN7

DDA18V_DAC

SS_DAC

RSV07

CIN6

Figure 2-2. Pin Map [Quadrant B]

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

DDR_DQ10

DDR_DQ11

DDR_DQ13

DDR_DQ15

DDR_GATE0

DDR_WE

DDR_CKE

DDR_VREF

DDR_DQ01

DDR_DQ05

DDR_DQ07

DDR_DQ00

DDR_DQ02

DDR_DQ03

DDR_DQS[0]

DDR_DQS[1]

DDR_DQM[1]

DDR_DQ14

DDR_DQ12

DDR_GATE1

DDR_DQ06

DDR_DQ08

DDR_DQ09

EM_A13

EM_A12

EM_A08

EM_A05

EM_BA1

EM_BA0

EM_D14

EM_D10

EM_D07

UART0_RXD

UART0_TXD

EM_A10

DDR_DQ04

DDR_DQM[0]

DD_DDR

UART1_RXD

EM_A04

UART1_TXD

EM_A09

I2C_SDA

I2C_SCL

EM_A11

EM_A07

DDA33_DDRDLL

SSA_DLL

DD_DDR

EM_A06

DD_DDR

EM_A02

EM_A01

EM_A03

EM_D13

EM_D04

EM_A00

EM_D08

EM_D15

EM_D11

EM_D06

EM_D12

EM_D09

Figure 2-3. Pin Map [Quadrant C]

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

EM_WE

EM_CE0

EM_ADV

EM_D01

EM_D03

EM_D00

EM_D05

EM_D02

ASP0_DX

SSA_PLL1

ASP0_FSX

ASP0_CLKR

ASP1_FSR

ASP1_CLKS

GIO007

GIO003

GIO002

EM_WAIT

ASP0_CLKX

ASP0_DR

EM_CE1

EM_OE

DDA_PLL1

ASP0_FSR

ASP1_FSX

SPI1_

SDENA[0]

TCK

RTCK

RESET

SPI1_SDO

CLKOUT1

SPI0_SCLK

GIO001

EM_CLK

ASP1_CLKX

ASP1_DR

MMCSD0_

DATA1

ASP1_CLKR

ASP1_DX

GIO005

SPI1_SCLK MMCSD0_CMD MMCSD1_CLK

CLKOUT3

SPI0_SDO

GIO000

SS_MX1

MMCSD0_

DATA0

MMCSD1_

DATA1

MMCSD1_

DATA3

SPI0_

SDENA[0]

MMCSD0_

DATA2

GIO004

GIO006

MMCSD0_

DATA3

MMCSD0_

CLK

MMCSD1_

DATA2

MMCSD1_

CMD

MMCSD1_

DATA0

SPI0_SDI

SPI1_SDI

CLKOUT2

Figure 2-4. Pin Map [Quadrant D]

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

2.4 Pin Functions

The pin functions tables (Table 2-4 through Table 2-22) identify the external signal names, the associated

pin (ball) numbers along with the mechanical package designator, the pin type, whether the pin has any

internal pullup or pulldown resistors, and a functional pin description. For more detailed information on

device configuration, peripheral selection, multiplexed/shared pins, and debugging considerations, see

Section 3. For the list of all pin in chronological order see Section 2.5

2.4.1 Image Data Input - Video Processing Front End

The CCD Controller module in the Video Processing Front End has an external signal interface for image

data input. It supports YUV (YC) inputs as well as Bayer RGB and complementary input signals (I.e.,

image data input).

The definition of the CCD controller data input signals depend on the input mode selected.

•

In 16-bit YCbCr mode, the Cb and Cr signals are multiplexed on the Cl signals and the order is

configurable (i.e., Cb first or Cr first).

•

In 8-bit YCbCr mode, the Y, Cb, and Cr signals are multiplexed and not only is the order selectable,

but also the half of the bus used.

Table 2-4. CCD Controller Signals for Each Input Mode

PIN NAME

Cl7

CCD

16-BIT YCbCr

Cb7,Cr7

Cb6,Cr6

Cb5,Cr5

Cb4,Cr4

Cb3,Cr3

Cb2,Cr2

Cb1,Cr1

Cb0,Cr0

8-BIT YCbCr

Y7,Cb7,Cr7

Y6,Cb6,Cr6

Y5,Cb5,Cr5

Y4,Cb4,Cr4

Y3,Cb3,Cr3

Y2,Cb2,Cr2

Y1,Cb1,Cr1

Y0,Cb0,Cr0

Y7,Cb7,Cr7

Y6,Cb6,Cr6

Y5,Cb5,Cr5

Y4,Cb4,Cr4

Y3,Cb3,Cr3

Y2,Cb2,Cr2

Y1,Cb1,Cr1

Y0,Cb0,Cr0

Cl6

Cl5

CCD13

CCD12

CCD11

CCD10

CCD9

CCD8

CCD7

CCD6

CCD5

CCD4

CCD3

CCD2

CCD1

CCD0

Cl4

Cl3

Cl2

Cl1

Cl0

Yl7

Yl6

Yl5

Yl4

Yl3

Yl2

Yl1

Yl0

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-5. CCD Controller/Video Input Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): NOT USED

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/SR[07]

CIN7/

GIO101/

SPI2_SCLK

V_{DD_VIN}

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[07]

I/O/Z

SPI: SPI2 Clock

GIO: GIO[101]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): NOT USED

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/SR[06]

CIN6/

GIO100/

SPI2_SDO

V_{DD_VIN}

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[06]

I/O/Z

SPI: SPI2 Data Out

GIO: GIO[100]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[13]

CIN5/

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/SR[05]

GIO099/

SPI2_SDEN

A[0]

V_{DD_VIN}

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[05]

SPI: SPI2 Chip Select

GIO: GIO[099]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[12]

CIN4/

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/SR[04]

GIO098/

SPI2_SDEN

A[1]

V_{DD_VIN}

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[04]

SPI: SPI2 Data In

GIO: GIO[098]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[11]

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/SR[03]

CIN3/

GIO097/

V_{DD_VIN}

I/O/Z

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[03]

GIO: GIO[097]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[10]

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/SR[02]

CIN2/

GIO096/

V_{DD_VIN}

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[02]

GIO: GIO[097]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[09]

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/SR[01]

CIN1/

GIO095/

V_{DD_VIN}

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[01]

GIO: GIO[095]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[08]

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/SR[00]

CIN0/

GIO094/

V_{DD_VIN}

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[00]

GIO: GIO[094]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[07]

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[07]

YIN7/

GIO093

V_{DD_VIN}

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[07]

GIO: GIO[093]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[06]

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[06]

YIN6/

GIO092

V_{DD_VIN}

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[06]

GIO: GIO[092]

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) PD = internal pull-down, PU = internal pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-5. CCD Controller/Video Input Terminal Functions (continued)

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[05]

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[05]

YIN5/

GIO091

V_{DD_VIN}

I/O/Z

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[05]

GIO: GIO[091]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[04]

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[04]

YIN4/

GIO090

V_{DD_VIN}

I/O/Z

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[04]

GIO: GIO[090]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[03]

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[03]

YIN3/

GIO089

V_{DD_VIN}

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[03]

GIO: GIO[089]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[02]

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[02]

YIN2/

GIO088

V_{DD_VIN}

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[02]

GIO: GIO[088]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[01]

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[01]

YIN1/

GIO087

V_{DD_VIN}

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[01]

GIO: GIO[087]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[00]

•

YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[00]

YIN0/

GIO086

V_{DD_VIN}

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time

multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[00]

GIO: GIO[086]

Horizontal synchronization signal that can be either an input (slave mode) or an

output (master mode). Tells the CCDC when a new line starts.

GIO: GIO[085]

CAM_HD/

GIO085

V_{DD_VIN}

I/O/Z

Vertical synchronization signal that can be either an input (slave mode) or an output

(master mode). Tells the CCDC when a new frame starts.

GIO: GIO[084]

CAM_VD

GIO084

V_{DD_VIN}

Write enable input signal is used by external device (AFE/TG) to gate the DDR

output of the CCDC module. Alternately, the field identification input signal is used

by external device (AFE/TG) to indicate which of two frames is input to the CCDC

module for sensors with interlaced output. CCDC handles 1- or 2-field sensors in

hardware.

CAM_WEN

_FIELD\

GIO083

V_{DD_VIN}

I/O/Z

GIO: GIO[083]

PCLK/

GIO082

V_{DD_VIN}

Pixel clock input (strobe for lines C17 through Y10)

GIO: GIO[0082]

2.4.2 Image Data Output - Video Processing Back End (VPBE)

The Video Encoder/Digital LCD interface module in the video processing back end has an external signal

interface for digital image data output as described in Table 2-7 and Table 2-8.

The digital image data output signals support multiple functions / interfaces, depending on the display

mode selected. The following table describes these modes. Parallel RGB mode with more than RGB565

signals requires enabling pin multiplexing to support (i.e., for RGB666 mode).

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-6. Signals for VPBE Display Modes

PIN NAME

YCC16

HSYNC

YCC8/

REC656

PRGB

SRGB

HSYNC

GIO073

HSYNC

VSYNC

GIO072

VSYNC

LCD_OE

GIO071

As needed

FIELD

GIO070

PWM3C

EXTCLK

GIO069

As needed

VCLK

As needed

VCLK

As needed

VCLK

As needed

VCLK

PWM3D

VCLK

GIO068

YOUT7

YOUT6

YOUT5

YOUT4

YOUT3

YOUT2

YOUT1

YOUT0

Y7,Cb7,Cr7

Y6,Cb6,Cr6

Y5,Cb5,Cr5

Y4,Cb4,Cr4

Y3,Cb3,Cr3

Y2,Cb2,Cr2

Y1,Cb1,Cr1

Y0,Cb0,Cr0

LCD_AC

Data7

Data6

Data5

Data4

Data3

Data2

Data1

Data0

LCD_AC

COUT7

GIO081

PWM0

COUT6

GIO080

PWM1

LCD_OE

BRIGHT

LCD_OE

BRIGHT

COUT5

GIO079

PWM2A

RTO0

COUT4

GIO078

PWM2B

RTO1

PWM

CSYNC

PWM

CSYNC

COUT3

GIO077

PWM2C

RTO2

COUT2

GIO076

PWM2D

RTO3

COUT1

GIO075

PWM3A

COUT0

GIO074

PWM3B

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-7. Digital Video Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION⁽⁴⁾

NAME

NO.

YOUT7-R7

YOUT6-R6

YOUT5-R5

YOUT4-R4

YOUT3-R3

YOUT2-G7

YOUT1-G6

YOUT0-G5

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function

COUT7-

G4/GIO081

/PWM0

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[081] PWM0

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[080] PWM1

COUT6-G3

/GIO080

/PWM1

V_{DD_VOUT}

COUT5-G2

/ GIO079 /

PWM2A /

RTO0

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[079] PWM2A RTO0

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[078] PWM2B RTO1

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[077] PWM2C RTO2

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[076] PWM2D RTO3

COUT4-B7 /

GIO078 /

PWM2B /

RTO1

COUT3-B6 /

GIO077 /

PWM2C /

RTO2

COUT2-B5 /

GIO076 /

PWM2D /

RTO3

COUT1-B4 /

GIO075 /

PWM3A

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function

GIO: GIO[075]

PWM3A

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

COUT0-B3 /

GIO074 /

PWM3B

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function

GIO: GIO[074]

PWM3B

V_{DD_VOUT}

HSYNC /

GIO073

V_{DD_VOUT}

Video Encoder: Horizontal Sync

GIO: GIO[073]

I/O/Z

VSYNC /

GIO072

V_{DD_VOUT}

Video Encoder: Vertical Sync

GIO: GIO[072]

FIELD /

GIO070 /

R2 /

Video Encoder: Field identifier for interlaced display formats

GIO: GIO[070]

Digital Video Out: R2

PWM3C

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

PWM3C

Video Encoder: External clock input, used if clock rates > 27 MHz are needed, e.g.

74.25 MHz for HDTV digital output

GIO: GIO[069]

Digital Video Out: B2

PWM3D

EXTCLK /

GIO069 /

B2 /

V_{DD_VOUT}

I/O/Z

PWM3D

VCLK /

GIO068

Video Encoder: Video Output Clock

GIO: GIO[068]

V_{DD_VOUT}

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

(4) To reduce EMI and reflections, depending on the trace length, approximately 22 Ω to 50 Ω damping resistors are recommend on the

following outputs placed near the DM355: YOUT(0-7),COUT(0-7), HSYNC,VSYNC,LCD_OE,FIELD,EXTCLK,VCLK. The trace lengths

should be minimized.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-8. Analog Video Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾OTHER⁽²⁾DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

Video DAC: Reference voltage output (0.45V, 0.1uF to GND). When the DAC is not

used, the VREF signal should be connected to V_SS

VREF

A I/O/Z

Video DAC: Pre video buffer DAC output (1000 ohm to VFB). When the DAC is not

used, the IOUT signal should be connected to V_SS

IOUT

IBIAS

VFB

Video DAC: External resistor (2550 Ohms to GND) connection for current bias

configuration. When the DAC is not used, the IBIAS signal should be connected to

A I/O/Z

V_SS

Video DAC: Pre video buffer DAC output (1000 Ohms to IOUT, 1070 Ohms to

TVOUT). When the DAC is not used, the VFB signal should be connected to V_SS

Video DAC: Analog Composite NTSC/PAL output (SeeFigure 5-31 andFigure 5-32 for

circuit connection). When the DAC is not used, the TVOUT signal should be left as a

TVOUT

No Connect or connected to V_SS

Video DAC: Analog 1.8V power. When the DAC is not used, the V_{DDA18_DAC}signal

should be connected to V_SS

Video DAC: Analog 1.8V ground. When the DAC is not used, the V_{SSA_DAC}signal

should be connected to V_SS

V_{DDA18_DAC}

V_{SSA_DAC}

PWR

GND

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal. Specifies the operating I/O supply

voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(2) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

2.4.3 Asynchronous External Memory Interface (AEMIF)

The Asynchronous External Memory Interface (AEMIF) signals support AEMIF, NAND, and OneNAND.

Table 2-9. Asynchronous EMIF/NAND/OneNAND Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

Async EMIF: Address bus bit[13]

GIO: GIO[67]

System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at power-on-reset to determine boot method. Used

to drive boot status LED signal (active low) in ROM boot modes.

EM_A13/

GIO067/

BTSEL[1]

V_DD

V19

I/O/Z

EM_A12/

GIO066/

BTSEL[0]

Async EMIF: Address bus bit[12]

GIO: GIO[66]

System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at power-on-reset to determine boot method.

V_DD

U19

R16

I/O/Z

Async EMIF: Address bus bit[11]

GIO: GIO[65]

AECFG[3:0] sampled at power-on-reset to AECFG configuration. AECFG[3] sets

default for PinMux2_EM_D15_8: AEMIF default bus width (16 or 8 bits)

EM_A11/

GIO065/

AECFG[3]

V_DD

Async EMIF: Address bus bit[10]

EM_A10/

GIO064/

AECFG[2]

GIO: GIO[64]

V_DD

R18

P17

I/O/Z

AECFG[3:0] sampled at power-on-reset to AECFG configuration. AECFG[2:1]

sets default for PinMux2_EM_BA0: AEMIF EM_BA0 definition (EM_BA0,

EM_A14, GIO[054], rsvd)

Async EMIF: Address bus bit[09]

GIO: GIO[63]

AECFG[3:0] sampled at power-on-reset to AECFG configuration. AECFG[2:1]

sets default for PinMux2_EM_BA0: AEMIF EM_BA0 definition (EM_BA0,

EM_A14, GIO[054], rsvd)

EM_A09/

GIO063/

AECFG[1]

V_DD

Async EMIF: Address bus bit[08]

GIO: GIO[62]

AECFG[0] sets default for:

EM_A08/

GIO062/

AECFG[0]

V_DD

T19

P16

I/O/Z

•

PinMux2_EM_A0_BA1: AEMIF address width (OneNAND or NAND)

PinMux2_EM_A13_3: AEMIF address width (OneNAND or NAND)

EM_A07/

GIO061

Async EMIF: Address bus bit[07]

GIO: GIO[61]

V_DD

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-9. Asynchronous EMIF/NAND/OneNAND Terminal Functions (continued)

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

EM_A06/

GIO060

Async EMIF: Address bus bit[06]

GIO: GIO[60]

P18

I/O/Z

V_DD

EM_A05/

GIO059

Async EMIF: Address bus bit[05]

GIO: GIO[59]

R19

P15

N18

N15

N17

M16

EM_A04/

GIO058

Async EMIF: Address bus bit[04]

GIO: GIO[58]

EM_A03/

GIO057

Async EMIF: Address bus bit[03]

GIO: GIO[57]

Async EMIF: Address bus bit[02]

NAND/SM/xD: CLE - Command latch enable output

EM_A02/

EM_A01/

Async EMIF: Address bus bit[01]

NAND/SM/xD: ALE - Address latch enable output

EM_A00/

GIO056

Async EMIF: Address bus bit[00]

GIO: GIO[56]

Async EMIF: Bank address 1 signal - 16-bit address:

EM_BA1/

GIO055

•

In 16-bit mode, lowest address bit.

P19

N19

I/O/Z

V_DD

In 8-bit mode, second lowest address bit.

GIO: GIO[055]

Async EMIF: Bank address 0 signal - 8-bit address:

EM_BA0/

GIO054

EM_A14

•

In 8-bit mode, lowest address bit. or can be used as an extra address line

(bit14) when using 16-bit memories.

V_DD

GIO: GIO[054]

EM_D15/

GIO053

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 15

GIO: GIO[053]

M18

M19

M15

L18

L17

L19

K18

L16

K19

K17

J19

L15

J18

H19

J17

H18

I/O/Z

V_DD

EM_D14/

GIO052

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 14

GIO: GIO[052]

EM_D13/

GIO051

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 13

GIO: GIO[051]

EM_D12/

GIO050

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 12

GIO: GIO[050]

EM_D11/

GIO049

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 11

GIO: GIO[049]

EM_D10/

GIO048

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 10

GIO: GIO[048]

EM_D09/

GIO047

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 09

GIO: GIO[047]

EM_D08/

GIO046

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 08

GIO: GIO[046]

EM_D07/

GIO045

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 07

GIO: GIO[045]

EM_D06/

GIO044

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 06

GIO: GIO[044]

EM_D05/

GIO043

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 05

GIO: GIO[043]

EM_D04/

GIO042

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 04

GIO: GIO[042]

EM_D03/

GIO041

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 03

GIO: GIO[041]

EM_D02/

GIO040

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 02

GIO: GIO[040]

EM_D01/

GIO039

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 01

GIO: GIO[039]

EM_D00/

GIO038

Async EMIF: Data bus bit 00

GIO: GIO[038]

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-9. Asynchronous EMIF/NAND/OneNAND Terminal Functions (continued)

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

Async EMIF: Lowest numbered chip select. Can be programmed to be used for

standard asynchronous memories (example: flash), OneNAND, or NAND

memory. Used for the default boot and ROM boot modes.

GIO: GIO[037]

EM_CE0/

GIO037

J16

I/O/Z

V_DD

Async EMIF: Second chip select. Can be programmed to be used for standard

asynchronous memories(example: flash), OneNAND, or NAND memory.

GIO: GIO[036]

EM_CE1/

GIO036

G19

J15

I/O/Z

V_DD

Async EMIF: Write Enable

NAND/SM/xD: WE (Write Enable) output

GIO: GIO[035]

EM_WE/

GIO035

Async EMIF: Output Enable

NAND/SM/xD: RE (Read Enable) output

GIO: GIO[034]

EM_OE/

GIO034

F19

G18

Async EMIF: Async WAIT

NAND/SM/xD: RDY/ BSY input

GIO: GIO[033]

EM_WAIT/

GIO033

EM_ADV/

GIO032

OneNAND: Address valid detect for OneNAND interface

GIO: GIO[032]

H16

E19

I/O/Z

V_DD

EM_CLK/

GIO031

OneNAND: Clock for OneNAND flash interface

GIO: GIO[031]

2.4.4 DDR Memory Interface

The DDR EMIF supports DDR2 and mobile DDR.

Table 2-10. DDR Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

NAME

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NO.

DDR_CLK

DDR_RAS

DDR_CAS

DDR_WE

DDR_CS

I/O/Z

V_{DD_DDR}

DDR Data Clock

DDR Complementary Data Clock

DDR Row Address Strobe

DDR Column Address Strobe

DDR Write Enable

W10

DDR Chip Select

DDR_CKE

V10

DDR Clock Enable

DDR_DQM[

Data mask outputs:

U15

T12

V15

I/O/Z

V_{DD_DDR}

•

DQM0 - For DDR_DQ[7:0]

DQM1 - For DDR_DQ[15:8]

DDR_DQM[

DDR_DQS[

Data strobe input/outputs for each byte of the 16-bit data bus used to

synchronize the data transfers. Output to DDR when writing and inputs when

reading.

DDR_DQS[

•

DQS1 - For DDR_DQ[15:8]

DQS0 - For DDR_DQ[7:0]

V12

I/O/Z

V_{DD_DDR}

DDR_BA[2]

DDR_BA[1]

DDR_BA[0]

DDR_A13

DDR_A12

DDR_A11

I/O/Z

V_{DD_DDR}

Bank select outputs. Two are required for 1Gb DDR2 memories.

DDR Address Bus bit 13

DDR Address Bus bit 12

DDR Address Bus bit 11

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-10. DDR Terminal Functions (continued)

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

DDR_A10

I/O/Z

V_{DD_DDR}

DDR Address Bus bit 10

DDR Address Bus bit 09

DDR Address Bus bit 08

DDR Address Bus bit 07

DDR Address Bus bit 06

DDR Address Bus bit 05

DDR Address Bus bit 04

DDR Address Bus bit 03

DDR Address Bus bit 02

DDR Address Bus bit 01

DDR Address Bus bit 00

DDR Data Bus bit 15

DDR Data Bus bit 14

DDR Data Bus bit 13

DDR Data Bus bit 12

DDR Data Bus bit 11

DDR Data Bus bit 10

DDR Data Bus bit 09

DDR Data Bus bit 08

DDR Data Bus bit 07

DDR Data Bus bit 06

DDR Data Bus bit 05

DDR Data Bus bit 04

DDR Data Bus bit 03

DDR Data Bus bit 02

DDR Data Bus bit 01

DDR Data Bus bit 00

DDR_A09

DDR_A08

DDR_A07

DDR_A06

DDR_A05

DDR_A04

DDR_A03

DDR_A02

DDR_A01

DDR_A00

DDR_DQ15

DDR_DQ14

DDR_DQ13

DDR_DQ12

DDR_DQ11

DDR_DQ10

DDR_DQ09

DDR_DQ08

DDR_DQ07

DDR_DQ06

DDR_DQ05

DDR_DQ04

DDR_DQ03

DDR_DQ02

DDR_DQ01

DDR_DQ00

W17

V16

W16

U16

W15

W14

V14

U13

W13

V13

W12

U12

T11

U11

W11

V11

DDR_GATE

DDR: Loopback signal for external DQS gating. Route to DDR and back to

DDR_GATE0 with same constraints as used for DDR clock and data.

W18

V17

I/O/Z

V_{DD_DDR}

DDR_GATE

DDR: Loopback signal for external DQS gating. Route to DDR and back to

DDR_GATE0 with same constraints as used for DDR clock and data.

DDR: Voltage input for the SSTL_18 I/O buffers. Note even in the case of mDDR

an external resistor divider connected to this pin is necessary.

DDR_VREF

V_{SSA_DLL}

U10

R11

R10

I/O/Z

V_{DD_DDR}

DDR: Ground for the DDR DLL

V_{DDA33_DDR}

DLL

DDR: Power (3.3 V) for the DDR DLL

DDR: Reference output for drive strength calibration of N and P channel outputs.

Tie to ground via 50 ohm resistor @ 0.5% tolerance.

DDR_ZN

I/O/Z

V_{DD_DDR}

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

2.4.5 GPIO

The General Purpose I/O signals provide generic I/O to external devices. Most of the GIO signals are

multiplexed with other functions.

Table 2-11. GPIO Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

GIO: GIO[000] Active low during MMC/SD boot (can be used as MMC/SD power

control).

GIO000

C16

I/O/Z

V_DD

Can be used as external clock input for Timer 3.

GIO001

GIO002

GIO003

GIO004

GIO005

GIO006

E14

F15

G15

B17

D15

B18

I/O/Z

V_DD

GIO: GIO[001] Can be used as external clock input for Timer 3.

GIO: GIO[002] Can be used as external clock input for Timer 3.

GIO: GIO[003] Can be used as external clock input for Timer 3.

GIO: GIO[004]

GIO: GIO[005]

GIO: GIO[006]

GIO007 /

SPI0_SDE

NA[1]

GIO: GIO[007]

SPI0: Chip Select 1

C17

E12

I/O/Z

V_DD

SPI1_SD

O /

GIO008

SPI1: Data Out

GIO: GIO[008]

V_DD

SPI1_SDI

/ GIO009 /

SPI1_SDE

NA[1]

A13

I/O/Z

V_DD

SPI1: Data In -OR- SPI1: Chip Select 1 GIO: GIO[009]

SPI1_SCL

K /

GIO010

SPI1: Clock GIO:

GIO[010]

C13

E13

R17

R15

I/O/Z

V_DD

SPI1_SDE

NA[0] /

GIO011

SPI1: Chip Select 0

GIO: GIO[011]

UART1_T

XD /

GIO012

UART1: Transmit Data

GIO: GIO[012]

UART1_R

XD /

GIO013

UART1: Receive Data

GIO: GIO[013]

I2C_SCL /

GIO014

I2C: Serial Clock GIO:

GIO[014]

R14

R13

C11

A11

D12

I/O/Z

V_DD

I2C_SDA /

GIO015

I2C: Serial Data

GIO: GIO[015]

CLKOUT3

/ GIO016

CLKOUT: Output Clock 3

GIO: GIO[016]

CLKOUT2

/ GIO017

CLKOUT: Output Clock 2

GIO: GIO[017]

CLKOUT1

/ GIO018

CLKOUT: Output Clock 1

GIO: GIO[018]

MMCSD1

_DATA0 /

GIO019 /

UART2_T

MMCSD1: DATA0

GIO: GIO[019]

UART2: Transmit Data

A18

I/O/Z

V_DD

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-11. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued)

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

MMCSD1

_DATA1 /

GIO020 /

UART2_R

MMCSD1: DATA1

GIO: GIO[020]

UART2: Receive Data

B15

I/O/Z

V_DD

MMCSD1

_DATA2 /

GIO021 /

UART2_C

MMCSD1: DATA2

GIO: GIO[021]

UART2: CTS

A16

B16

I/O/Z

V_DD

MMCSD1

_DATA3 /

GIO022 /

UART2_R

MMCSD1: DATA3

GIO: GIO[022]

UART2: RTS

V_DD

MMCSD1

_CMD /

GIO023

MMCSD1: Command

GIO: GIO[023]

A17

C15

F16

I/O/Z

V_DD

MMCSD1

_CLK /

GIO024

MMCSD1: Clock

GIO: GIO[024]

ASP0_FS

R /

GIO025

ASP0: Receive Frame Synch

GIO: GIO[025]

ASP0_CL

KR /

GIO026

ASP0: Receive Clock

GIO: GIO[026]

F17

E18

G17

I/O/Z

V_DD

ASP0_DR

/ GIO027

ASP0: Receive Data

GIO: GIO[027]

ASP0_FS

X /

GIO028

ASP0: Transmit Frame Synch

GIO: GIO[028]

ASP0_CL

KX /

GIO029

ASP0: Transmit Clock

GIO: GIO[029]

F18

I/O/Z

V_DD

ASP0_DX

/ GIO030

ASP0: Transmit Data

GIO: GIO[030]

H15

E19

H16

G18

I/O/Z

V_DD

EM_CLK /

GIO031

OneNAND: Clock signal for OneNAND flash interface GIO: GIO[031]

EM_ADV /

GIO032

V_DD

OneNAND: Address Valid Detect for OneNAND interface

GIO: GIO[032]

EM_WAIT

/ GIO033

V_DD

Async EMIF: Async WAIT NAND/SM/xD: RDY/_BSY input

GIO: GIO[033]

Async EMIF: Output Enable

NAND/SM/xD: RE (Read Enable) output

GIO: GIO[034]

EM_OE /

GIO034

F19

J15

G19

I/O/Z

V_DD

Async EMIF: Write Enable

NAND/SM/xD: WE (Write Enable) output

GIO: GIO[035]

EM_WE /

GIO035

Async EMIF: Second Chip Select., Can be programmed to be used for standard

asynchronous memories (example: flash), OneNand or NAND memory.

GIO: GIO[036]

EM_CE1 /

GIO036

Async EMIF: Lowest numbered Chip Select. Can be programmed to be used for

standard asynchronous memories (example: flash), OneNand or NAND memory.

Used for the default boot and ROM boot modes.

EM_CE0 /

GIO037

J16

I/O/Z

V_DD

GIO: GIO[037]

EM_D00 /

GIO038

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[00]

GIO: GIO[038]

H18

V_DD

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-11. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued)

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

EM_D01 /

GIO039

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[01]

GIO: GIO[039]

J17

I/O/Z

V_DD

EM_D02 /

GIO040

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[02]

GIO: GIO[040]

H19

J18

L15

J19

K17

K19

L16

K18

L19

L17

L18

M15

M19

M18

EM_D03 /

GIO041

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[03]

GIO: GIO[041]

EM_D04 /

GIO042

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[04]

GIO: GIO[042]

EM_D05 /

GIO043

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[05]

GIO: GIO[043]

EM_D06 /

GIO044

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[06]

GIO: GIO[044]

EM_D07 /

GIO045

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[07]

GIO: GIO[045]

EM_D08 /

GIO046

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[08]

GIO: GIO[046]

EM_D09 /

GIO047

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[09]

GIO: GIO[047]

EM_D10 /

GIO048

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[10]

GIO: GIO[048]

EM_D11 /

GIO049

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[11]

GIO: GIO[049]

EM_D12 /

GIO050

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[12]

GIO: GIO[050]

EM_D13 /

GIO051

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[13]

GIO: GIO[051]

EM_D14 /

GIO052

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[14]

GIO: GIO[052]

EM_D15 /

GIO053

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[15]

GIO: GIO[053]

Async EMIF: Bank Address 0 signal = 8-bit address. In 8-bit mode, lowest

address bit. Or, can be used as an extra Address line (bit[14] when using 16-bit

memories.

GIO: GIO[054]

EM_BA0 /

GIO054 /

EM_A14

N19

I/O/Z

V_DD

Async EMIF: Bank Address 1 signal = 16-bit address. In 16-bit mode, lowest

address bit. In 8-bit mode, second lowest address bit

GIO: GIO[055]

EM_BA1 /

GIO055

P19

M16

I/O/Z

V_DD

Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[00] Note that the EM_A0 is always a 32-bit

address

GIO: GIO[056]

EM_A00 /

GIO056

V_DD

EM_A03 /

GIO057

Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[03]

GIO: GIO[057]

N18

P15

R19

P18

P16

I/O/Z

V_DD

EM_A04 /

GIO058

Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[04]

GIO: GIO[058]

EM_A05 /

GIO059

Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[05]

GIO: GIO[059]

EM_A06 /

GIO060

Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[06]

GIO: GIO[060]

EM_A07 /

GIO061

Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[07]

GIO: GIO[061] - Used by ROM Bootloader to provide progress status via LED

Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[08]

EM_A08 /

GIO062 /

AECFG[0]

V_DD

GIO: GIO[062] AECFG[0] sets default for - PinMux2.EM_A0_BA1: AEMIF

Address Width (OneNAND or NAND) - PinMux2.EM_A13_3: AEMIF Address

Width (OneNAND or NAND)

T19

I/O/Z

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-11. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued)

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[09]

EM_A09 /

GIO063 /

AECFG[1]

V_DD

GIO: GIO[063] System: AECFG[3:0] sampled at Power-on-Reset to set AEMIF

Configuration AECFG[2:1] sets default for PinMux2.EM_BA0: AEMIF EM_BA0

Definition (EM_BA0, EM_A14, GIO[054], rsvd)

P17

I/O/Z

Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[10]

EM_A10 /

GIO064 /

AECFG[2]

V_DD

GIO: GIO[064] System: AECFG[3:0] sampled at Power-on-Reset to set AEMIF

Configuration AECFG[2:1] sets default for PinMux2.EM_BA0: AEMIF EM_BA0

Definition (EM_BA0, EM_A14, GIO[054], rsvd)

R18

I/O/Z

Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[11]

EM_A11 /

GIO065 /

AECFG[3]

V_DD

GIO: GIO[065] System: AECFG[3:0] sampled at Power-on-Reset to set AEMIF

Configuration AECFG[3] sets default for PinMux2.EM_D15_8: AEMIF Default

Bus Width (16 or 8 bits)

R16

U19

I/O/Z

EM_A12 /

GIO066 /

BTSEL[0]

Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[12]

GIO: GIO[066] System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at Power-on-Reset to determine

Boot method

V_DD

Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[13]

EM_A13 /

GIO067 /

BTSEL[1]

V_DD

GIO: GIO[067] System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at Power-on-Reset to determine

Boot method Used to drive Boot Status LED signal (active low) in ROM boot

modes

V19

I/O/Z

VCLK /

GIO068

Video Encoder: Video Output Clock

GIO: GIO[068]

V_{DD_VOUT}

EXTCLK /

GIO069 /

B2 /

Video Encoder: External clock input, used if clock rates > 27 MHz are needed,

e.g. 74.25 MHz for HDTV digital output

GIO: GIO[069] Digital Video Out: B2 PWM3D

V_{DD_VOUT}

PWM3D

FIELD /

GIO070 /

R2 /

Video Encoder: Field identifier for interlaced display formats

GIO: GIO[070] Digital Video Out: R2 PWM3C

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

PWM3C

VSYNC /

GIO072

V_{DD_VOUT}

Video Encoder: Vertical Sync

GIO: GIO[072]

I/O/Z

HSYNC /

GIO073

V_{DD_VOUT}

Video Encoder: Horizontal Sync

GIO: GIO[073]

COUT0-

B3 /

GIO074 /

PWM3B

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[074]

PWM3B

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

COUT1-

B4 /

GIO075 /

PWM3A

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[075]

PWM3A

V_{DD_VOUT}

COUT2-

B5 /

GIO076 /

PWM2D /

RTO3

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[076] PWM2D

RTO3

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

COUT3-

B6 /

GIO077 /

PWM2C /

RTO2

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[077] PWM2C

RTO2

COUT4-

B7 /

GIO078 /

PWM2B /

RTO1

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[078] PWM2B

RTO1

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-11. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued)

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

COUT5-

G2 /

GIO079 /

PWM2A /

RTO0

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[079] PWM2A

RTO0

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

COUT6-

G3 /

GIO080 /

PWM1

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[080]

PWM1

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

COUT7-

G4 /

GIO081 /

PWM0

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[081]

PWM0

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

PCLK /

GIO082

V_{DD_VIN}

Pixel clock input (strobe for lines CI7 through YI0) GIO: GIO[082]

Write enable input signal is used by external device (AFE/TG) to gate the DDR

output of the CCDC module. Alternately, the field identification input signal is

used by external device (AFE/TG) to indicate the which of two frames is input to

the CCDC module for sensors with interlaced output. CCDC handles 1- or 2-field

sensors in hardware. GIO: GIO[083]

CAM_WE

N_FIELD /

GIO083

V_{DD_VIN}

I/O/Z

Vertical synchronization signal that can be either an input (slave mode) or an

output (master mode). Tells the CCDC when a new frame starts.

GIO: GIO[084]

CAM_VD /

GIO084

V_{DD_VIN}

I/O/Z

Horizontal synchronization signal that can be either an input (slave mode) or an

output (master mode). Tells the CCDC when a new line starts.

GIO: GIO[085]

CAM_HD /

GIO085

V_{DD_VIN}

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): raw[00] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed

between luma: Y[00] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder

inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel.

Y/CB/CR[00]

YIN0 /

GIO086

V_{DD_VIN}

I/O/Z

GIO: GIO[086]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): raw[01] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed

between luma: Y[01] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder

inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel.

Y/CB/CR[01]

YIN1 /

GIO087

V_{DD_VIN}

GIO: GIO[087]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): raw[02] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed

between luma: Y[02] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder

inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel.

Y/CB/CR[02]

YIN2 /

GIO088

V_{DD_VIN}

GIO: GIO[088]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): raw[03] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed

between luma: Y[03] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder

inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel.

Y/CB/CR[03]

YIN3 /

GIO089

V_{DD_VIN}

GIO: GIO[089]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): raw[04] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed

between luma: Y[04] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder

inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel.

Y/CB/CR[04]

YIN4 /

GIO090

V_{DD_VIN}

GIO: GIO[090]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): raw[05] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed

between luma: Y[05] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder

inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel.

Y/CB/CR[05]

YIN5 /

GIO091

V_{DD_VIN}

GIO: GIO[091]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): raw[06] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed

between luma: Y[06] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder

inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel.

Y/CB/CR[06]

YIN6 /

GIO092

V_{DD_VIN}

GIO: GIO[092]

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-11. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued)

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): raw[07] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed

between luma: Y[07] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder

inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel.

Y/CB/CR[07]

YIN7 /

GIO093

V_{DD_VIN}

I/O/Z

GIO: GIO[093]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): raw[08] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed

between chroma: CB/CR[00] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper

channel. Y/CB/CR[00]

CIN0 /

GIO094

V_{DD_VIN}

I/O/Z

GIO: GIO[094]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): raw[09] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed

between chroma: CB/CR[01] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper

channel. Y/CB/CR[01]

CIN1 /

GIO095

V_{DD_VIN}

GIO: GIO[095]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): raw[10] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed

between chroma: CB/CR[02] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper

channel. Y/CB/CR[02]

CIN2 /

GIO096

V_{DD_VIN}

GIO: GIO[096]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): raw[11] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed

between chroma: CB/CR[03] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper

channel. Y/CB/CR[03]

CIN3 /

GIO097

V_{DD_VIN}

GIO: GIO[097]

CIN4 /

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): raw[12] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed

between chroma: CB/CR[04] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper

channel. Y/CB/CR[04] SPI: SPI2 Data In

GIO098 /

SPI2_SDI

SPI2_SDE

NA[1]

V_{DD_VIN}

I/O/Z

GIO: GIO[098]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): raw[13] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed

between chroma: CB/CR[05] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper

channel. Y/CB/CR[05] SPI: SPI2 Chip Select

CIN5 /

GIO099 /

SPI2_SDE

NA[0]

V_{DD_VIN}

I/O/Z

GIO: GIO[99]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): NOT USED YCC 16-bit: time

multiplexed between chroma: CB/CR[06] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2

simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of

the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[06] SPI: SPI2 Data Out

CIN6 /

GIO100 /

SPI2_SD

V_{DD_VIN}

GIO: GIO[100]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): NOT USED YCC 16-bit: time

multiplexed between chroma: CB/CR[07] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2

simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of

the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[07] SPI: SPI2 Clock

CIN7 /

GIO101 /

SPI2_SCL

V_{DD_VIN}

GIO: GIO[101]

SPI0_SDI

/ GIO102

SPI0: Data In

GIO: GIO[102]

A12

B12

I/O/Z

V_DD

SPI0_SDE

NA[0] /

GIO103

SPI0: Chip Select 0

GIO: GIO[103]

V_DD

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

2.4.6 Multi-Media Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD) Interfaces

The DM355 includes two Multi-Media Card/Secure Digital card interfaces that are compatible with the

MMC/SD and SDIO protocol.

Table 2-12. MMC/SD Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

MMCSD0_

CLK

A15

I/O/Z

V_DD

MMCSD0: Clock

MMCSD0_

CMD

C14

B14

D14

B13

A14

MMCSD0: Command

MMCSD0: DATA0

MMCSD0: DATA1

MMCSD0: DATA2

MMCSD0: DATA3

MMCSD0_

DATA0

MMCSD0_

DATA1

MMCSD0_

DATA2

MMCSD0_

DATA3

MMCSD1_

CLK/

GIO024

MMCSD1: Clock

GIO: GIO[024]

C15

A17

I/O/Z

V_DD

MMCSD1_

CMD/

GIO023

MMCSD1: Command

GIO: GIO[023]

V_DD

MMCSD1_

DATA0/

GIO019/

UART2_T

MMCSD1: DATA0

GIO: GIO[019]

UART2: Transmit data

A18

B15

A16

B16

I/O/Z

V_DD

MMCSD1_

DATA1/

GIO020/

UART2_R

MMCSD1: DATA1

GIO: GIO[020]

UART2: Receive data

MMCSD1_

DATA2/

GIO021/

UART2_C

MMCSD1: DATA2

GIO: GIO[021]

UART2: CTS

MMCSD1_

DATA3/

GIO022/

UART2_R

MMCSD1: DATA3

GIO: GIO[022]

UART2: RTS

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

2.4.7 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Interface

The Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface supports the USB2.0 High-Speed protocol and includes dual-role

Host/Slave support. However, no charge pump is included.

Table 2-13. USB Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

USB D+ (differential signal pair).

When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to V_{SS_USB}

USB_DP

A I/O/Z

V_{DDA33_USB}

USB D- (differential signal pair).

When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to V_{SS_USB}

USB_DM

USB_R1

USB reference current output

Connect to VSS_USB_REF via 10K ohm , 1% resistor placed as close to the

device as possible.

A I/O/Z

When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to V_{SS_USB}

USB operating mode identification pin

For Device mode operation only, pull up this pin to VDD with a 1.5K ohm resistor.

For Host mode operation only, pull down this pin to ground (VSS) with a 1.5K

ohm resistor.

If using an OTG or mini-USB connector, this pin will be set properly via the

cable/connector configuration.

USB_ID

A I/O/Z

V_{DDA33_USB}

When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to V_{SS_USB}

For host or device mode operation, tie the VBUS/USB power signal to the USB

connector.

When used in OTG mode operation, tie VBUS to the external charge pump and

to the VBUS signal on the USB connector.

USB_VBUS

A I/O/Z

V_DD

When the USB is not used, tie VBUS to Vss_USB.

Digital output to control external 5 V supply

When USB is not used, this signal should be left as a No Connect.

USB_DRVVBUS

V_{SS_USB_REF}

O/Z

V_DD

USB Ground Reference

Connect directly to ground and to USB_R1 via 10K ohm, 1% resistor placed as

close to the device as possible

GND

V_DD

Analog 3.3 V power USBPHY

When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to V_{SS_USB}

V_{DDA33_USB}

V_{DDA33_USB_PLL}

V_{DDA13_USB}

V_{DDD13_USB}

PWR

V_DD

Common mode 3.3 V power for USB PHY (PLL)

When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to V_{SS_USB}

Analog 1.3 V power for USB PHY

When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to V_{SS_USB}

Digital 1.3 V power for USB PHY

When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to V_{SS_USB}

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3 , Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

2.4.8 Audio Interfaces

The DM355 includes two Audio Serial Ports (ASP ports), which are backward compatible with other TI

ASP serial ports and provide I2S audio interface. One interface is multiplexed with GIO signals.

Table 2-14. ASP Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

ASP0_CL

KR/

GIO026

ASP0: Receive Clock

GIO: GIO[026]

F17

I/O/Z

V_DD

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-14. ASP Terminal Functions (continued)

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

ASP0_CL

KX /

GIO029

ASP0: Transmit Clock

GIO: GIO[029]

F18

I/O/Z

V_DD

ASP0_DR

GIO027

ASP0: Receive DataF

GIO: GIO[027]

E18

H15

F16

G17

I/O/Z

V_DD

ASP0_DX

GIO030

ASP0: Transmit Data

GIO: GIO[030]

ASP0_FS

R /

GIO025

ASP0: Receive Frame Synch

GIO: GIO[025]

ASP0_FS

X /

ASP0: Transmit Frame SynchGIO: GIO[028]

GIO028

ASP1_CL

D18

D17

D19

I/O/Z

I/Z

V_DD

ASP1: Receive Clock

ASP1: Master Clock

ASP1: Transmit Clock

ASP1_CL

I/O/Z

ASP1_DR

ASP1_DX

C19

C18

I/O/Z

V_DD

ASP1: Receive Data

ASP1: Transmit Data

ASP1_FS

E17

E16

I/O/Z

V_DD

ASP1: Receive Frame Synch

ASP1: Transmit Frame Sync

ASP1_FS

2.4.9 UART Interface

The includes three UART ports. These ports are multiplexed with GIO and other signals.

Table 2-15. UART Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

U18

T18

UART0_RXD

UART0_TXD

V_DD

UART0: Receive data. Used for UART boot mode

UART0: Transmit data. Used for UART boot mode

UART1_RXD/

GIO013

UART1: Receive data.

GIO: GIO013

R15

R17

I/O/Z

V_DD

UART1_TXD/

GIO012

UART1: Transmit data.

GIO: GIO012

MMCSD1_DA

TA2/

GIO021/

MMCSD1: DATA2

GIO: GIO021

UART2: CTS

A16

B16

B15

I/O/Z

V_DD

UART2_CTS

MMCSD1_DA

TA3/

GIO022/

MMCSD1: DATA3

GIO: GIO022

UART2: RTS

UART2_RTS

MMCSD1_DA

TA1/

GIO020/

MMCSD1: DATA1

GIO: GIO020

UART2: RXD

UART2_RXD

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-15. UART Terminal Functions (continued)

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

MMCSD1_DA

TA0/

GIO019/

MMCSD1: DATA0

GIO: GIO019

UART2: TXD

A18

I/O/Z

V_DD

UART2_TXD

2.4.10 I²C Interface

The includes an I²C two-wire serial interface for control of external peripherals. This interface is

multiplexed with GIO signals.

Table 2-16. I²C Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

I2C_SDA/

GIO015

I2C: Serial data

GIO: GIO015

R13

I/O/Z

V_DD

I2C_SCL/

GIO014

I2C: Serial clock

GIO: GIO014

R14

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

2.4.11 Serial Interface

The includes three independent serial ports. These interfaces are multiplexed with GIO and other signals.

Table 2-17. SPI Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

SPI0_SCLK

C12

I/O/Z

V_DD

SPI0: Clock

SPI0_SDENA[0]/

GIO103

SPI0: Chip select 0

GIO: GIO[103]

B12

C17

GIO007

SPI0_SDENA[1]

GIO: GIO[007]

SPI0: Chip select 1

I/O/Z

V_DD

SPI0_SDI/

GIO102

SPI0: Data in

GIO: GIO[102]

A12

B11

C13

I/O/Z

V_DD

SPI0_SDO

SPI0: Data out

SPI1_SCLK/

GIO010

SPI1: Clock

GIO: GIO[010]

SPI1: Chip select 0

GIO: GIO[011] - Active low during MMC/SD boot (can be used as

MMC/SD power control)

SPI1_SDENA[0]/

GIO011

E13

I/O/Z

V_DD

SPI1_SDI/

GIO009/

SPI1_SDENA[1]

SPI1: Data in or

SPI1: Chip select

GIO: GIO[09]

A13

E12

I/O/Z

V_DD

SPI1_SDO/

GIO008

SPI1: Data out

GIO: GIO[008]

V_DD

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-17. SPI Terminal Functions (continued)

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Not used

•

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between chroma. CB/CR[07]

CIN7/

GIO101/

SPI2_SCLK

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is

time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.

Y/CB/CR[07]

V_{DD_VIN}

I/O/Z

SPI: SPI2 clock

GIO: GIO[101]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[13]

•

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between chroma. CB/CR[05]

CIN5/

GIO099/

SPI2_SDENA[0]

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is

time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.

Y/CB/CR[07]

V_{DD_VIN}

I/O/Z

SPI: SPI2 chip select

GIO: GIO[099]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Raw[12]

•

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between chroma. CB/CR[04]

CIN4/

GIO098/

SPI2_SDI/

SPI2_SDENA[1]

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is

time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.

Y/CB/CR[04]

V_{DD_VIN}

SPI: SPI2 Data in

GIO: GIO[0998]

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE): Not used

•

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between chroma. CB/CR[06]

CIN6/

GIO100/

SPI2_SDO/

YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is

time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.

Y/CB/CR[06]

V_{DD_VIN}

SPI: SPI2 Data out

GIO: GIO[100]

2.4.12 Clock Interface

The provides interface with the system clocks.

Table 2-18. Clocks Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

CLKOUT1

/ GIO018

CLKOUT: Output Clock 1

GIO: GIO[018]

D12

I/O/Z

V_DD

CLKOUT2

/ GIO017

CLKOUT: Output Clock 2

GIO: GIO[017]

A11

CLKOUT3

/ GIO016

CLKOUT: Output Clock 3

GIO: GIO[016]

C11

I/O/Z

V_DD

MXI1

Crystal input for system oscillator (24 MHz or 36 MHz)

Output for system oscillator (24 MHz or 36 MHz). When the MX02 is not used,

the MX02 signal can be left open.

MXO1

Crystal input for video oscillator (27 MHz) Optional, use only if 27MHz derived

from MXI1 and PLL does not provide sufficient performance for Video DAC.

When the MX12 is not used and powered down, the MXI2 signal should be left

as a No Connect

MXI2

V_DD

Output for video oscillator (27 MHz) Optional, use only if 27MHz derived from

MXI1 and PLL does not provide sufficient performance for Video DAC When the

MXO2 is not used and powered down, the MXO2 signal should be left as a No

Connect.

MXO2

V_DD

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

2.4.13 Real Time Output (RTO) Interface

The provides Real Time Output (RTO) interface.

Table 2-19. RTO Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

COUT5-

G2 /

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[079]

GIO079 /

PWM2A /

RTO0

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

PWM2A

RTO0

COUT4-

B7 /

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[078]

GIO078 /

PWM2B /

RTO1

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

PWM2B

RTO1

COUT3-

B6 /

GIO077 /

PWM2C /

RTO2

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[077]

PWM2C

RTO2

COUT2-

B5 /

GIO076 /

PWM2D /

RTO3

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[076]

PWM2D

RTO3

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

2.4.14 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Interface

The provides Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) interface.

Table 2-20. PWM Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

COUT7-

G4 /

GIO081 /

PWM0

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[081]

PWM0

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

COUT6-

G3 /

GIO080 /

PWM1

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[080]

PWM1

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

COUT5-

G2 /

GIO079 /

PWM2A /

RTO0

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[079]

PWM2A

RTO0

V_{DD_VOUT}

COUT4-

B7 /

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[078]

GIO078 /

PWM2B /

RTO1

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

PWM2B

RTO1

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-20. PWM Terminal Functions (continued)

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

COUT3-

B6 /

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[077]

GIO077 /

PWM2C /

RTO2

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

PWM2C

RTO2

COUT2-

B5 /

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[076]

GIO076 /

PWM2D /

RTO3

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

PWM2D

RTO3

COUT1-

B4 /

GIO075 /

PWM3A

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[075]

PWM3A

I/O/Z

V_{DD_VOUT}

COUT0-

B3 /

GIO074 /

PWM3B

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[074]

PWM3B

FIELD /

GIO070 /

R2 /

Video Encoder: Field identifier for interlaced display formats GIO: GIO[070]

Digital Video Out: R2

PWM3C

EXTCLK /

GIO069 /

B2 /

Video Encoder: External clock input, used if clock rates > 27 MHz are needed,

e.g. 74.25 MHz for HDTV digital output GIO: GIO[069] Digital Video Out: B2

PWM3D

V_{DD_VOUT}

PWM3D

2.4.15 System Configuration Interface

The provides interfaces for system configuration and boot load.

Table 2-21. System/Boot Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

Async EMIF: Address bus bit 13

GIO: GIO[067]

System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at power-on-reset to determine boot method. Used

to drive boot status LED signal (active low) in ROM boot modes.

EM_A13/

GIO067/

BTSEL[1]

V_DD

V19

I/O/Z

EM_A12/

GIO066/

BTSEL[0]

Async EMIF: Address bus bit 12

GIO: GIO[066]

System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at power-on-reset to determine boot method.

V_DD

U19

R16

I/O/Z

Async EMIF: Address bus bit 11

GIO: GIO[065]

System: AECFG[3:0] sampled a power-on-reset to set AEMIF configuration.

AECFG[3] sets default fo PinMux2.EM_D15_8. AEMIF default bus width (16 or 8

bits).

EM_A11/

GIO065/

AECFG[3]

V_DD

Async EMIF: Address bus bit 10

EM_A10/

GIO064/

AECFG[2]

GIO: GIO[064]

V_DD

R18

P17

I/O/Z

System: AECFG[3:0] sampled a power-on-reset to set AEMIF configuration.

AECFG[2:1] sets default fo PinMux2.EM_BA0. AEMIF EM_BA0 definition:

(EM,_BA0, EM_A14, GOP[054], rsvd)

Async EMIF: Address bus bit 09

GIO: GIO[063]

System: AECFG[3:0] sampled a power-on-reset to set AEMIF configuration.

AECFG[2:1] sets default fo PinMux2.EM_BA0. AEMIF EM_BA0 definition:

(EM,_BA0, EM_A14, GOP[054], rsvd)

EM_A09/

GIO063/

AECFG[1]

V_DD

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-21. System/Boot Terminal Functions (continued)

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

Async EMIF: Address bus bit 08

GIO: GIO[062]

System: AECFG[0] sets default for:

EM_A08/

GIO062/

AECFG[0]

V_DD

T19

I/O/Z

•

PinMux2.EM_A0_BA1 - AEMIF address width (OneNAND, or NAND)

PinMux2.EM_A13_3 - AEMIF address width (OneNAND, or NAND)

2.4.16 Emulation

The emulation interface allow software and hardware debugging.

Table 2-22. Emulation Terminal Functions

TERMINAL

TYPE⁽¹⁾

OTHER⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

DESCRIPTION

NAME

NO.

TCK

E10

V_DD

JTAG test clock input

JTAG test data input

JTAG test data output

JTAG test mode select

V_DD

TDI

TDO

TMS

V_DD

TRST

RTCK

JTAG test logic reset (active low)

JTAG test clock output

E11

V_DD

JTAG emulation 0 I/O

EMU[1:0] = 00 - Force Debug Scan chain (ARM and ARM ETB TAPs connected)

EMU[1:0] = 11 - Normal Scan chain (ICEpick only)

V_DD

EMU0

EMU1

I/O/Z

JTAG emulation 1 I/O

EMU[1:0] = 00 - Force Debug Scan chain (ARM and ARM ETB TAPs connected)

EMU[1:0] = 11 - Normal Scan chain (ICEpick only)

V_DD

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

2.5 Pin List

Table 2-23 provides a complete pin description list in pin number order.

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

CIN7 / GIO101 /

SPI2_SCLK

I/O CCDC

/ GIO /

V_{DD_VIN}

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

NOT USED

PINMUX0[1:0].CIN_

SPI2

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between

chroma: CB/CR[07]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between

luma and chroma of the upper channel.

Y/CB/CR[07]

SPI: SPI2 Clock

GIO: GIO[101]

CIN6 / GIO100 /

SPI2_SDO

I/O CCDC

/ GIO /

V_{DD_VIN}

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

NOT USED

PINMUX0[3:2].CIN_

SPI2

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between

chroma: CB/CR[06]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between luma and chroma of the upper

channel. Y/CB/CR[06]

SPI: SPI2 Data Out

GIO: GIO[100]

CIN5 / GIO099 /

SPI2_SDENA[0]

I/O CCDC

/ GIO /

V_{DD_VIN}

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

raw[13]

PINMUX0[5:4].CIN_

SPI2

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between

chroma: CB/CR[05]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between luma and chroma of the upper

channel. Y/CB/CR[05]

SPI: SPI2 Chip Select

GIO: GIO[99]

CIN4 / GIO098 /

SPI2_SDI /

I/O CCDC

/ GIO /

V_{DD_VIN}

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

raw[12]

PINMUX0[7:6].CIN_

SPI2_SDENA[1]

SPI2 /

SPI2

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between

chroma: CB/CR[04]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between luma and chroma of the upper

channel. Y/CB/CR[04]

SPI: SPI2 Data In

GIO: GIO[098]

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.

(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.

(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)

(4) To reduce EMI and reflections, depending on the trace length, approximately 22 Ω to 50 Ω damping resistors are recommend on the

following outputs placed near the DM355: YOUT(0-7),COUT(0-7), HSYNC,VSYNC,LCD_OE,FIELD,EXTCLK,VCLK. The trace lengths

should be minimized.

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

CIN3 / GIO097

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

V_{DD_VIN}

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

raw[11]

PINMUX0[8].CIN_32

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between

chroma: CB/CR[03]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between luma and chroma of the upper

channel. Y/CB/CR[03]

GIO: GIO[097]

CIN2 / GIO096

CIN1 / GIO095

CIN0 / GIO094

YIN7 / GIO093

YIN6 / GIO092

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

raw[10]

PINMUX0[8].CIN_32

PINMUX0[9].CIN_10

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between

chroma: CB/CR[02]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between luma and chroma of the upper

channel. Y/CB/CR[02]

GIO: GIO[096]

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

raw[09]

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between

chroma: CB/CR[01]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between luma and chroma of the upper

channel. Y/CB/CR[01]

GIO: GIO[095]

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

raw[08]

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between

chroma: CB/CR[00]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between luma and chroma of the upper

channel. Y/CB/CR[00]

GIO: GIO[094]

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

raw[07]

PINMUX0[10].YIN_7

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:

Y[07]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between luma and chroma of the lower

channel. Y/CB/CR[07]

GIO: GIO[093]

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

raw[06]

PINMUX0[10].YIN_7

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:

Y[06]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between luma and chroma of the lower

channel. Y/CB/CR[06]

GIO: GIO[092]

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

YIN5 / GIO091

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

V_{DD_VIN}

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

raw[05]

PINMUX0[10].YIN_7

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:

Y[05]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between luma and chroma of the lower

channel. Y/CB/CR[05]

GIO: GIO[091]

YIN4 / GIO090

YIN3 / GIO089

YIN2 / GIO088

YIN1 / GIO087

YIN0 / GIO086

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

raw[04]

PINMUX0[10].YIN_7

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:

Y[04]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between luma and chroma of the lower

channel. Y/CB/CR[04]

GIO: GIO[090]

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

raw[03]

PINMUX0[10].YIN_7

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:

Y[03]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between luma and chroma of the lower

channel. Y/CB/CR[03]

GIO: GIO[089]

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

raw[02]

PINMUX0[10].YIN_7

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:

Y[02]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between luma and chroma of the lower

channel. Y/CB/CR[02]

GIO: GIO[088]

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

raw[01]

PINMUX0[10].YIN_7

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:

Y[01]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between luma and chroma of the lower

channel. Y/CB/CR[01]

GIO: GIO[087]

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

Standard CCD Analog Front End (AFE):

raw[00]

PINMUX0[10].YIN_7

YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:

Y[00]

YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous

decoder inputs), it is time multiplexed

between luma and chroma of the lower

channel. Y/CB/CR[00]

GIO: GIO[086]

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

CAM_HD /

GIO085

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

V_{DD_VIN}

Horizontal synchronization signal that can be PINMUX0[11].CAM_

either an input (slave mode) or an output

(master mode). Tells the CCDC when a new

line starts.

GIO: GIO[085]

CAM_VD /

GIO084

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

Vertical synchronization signal that can be

either an input (slave mode) or an output

(master mode). Tells the CCDC when a new

frame starts.

PINMUX0[12].CAM_

GIO: GIO[084]

CAM_WEN_FIE

LD / GIO083

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

Write enable input signal is used by external PINMUX0[13].CAM_

device (AFE/TG) to gate the DDR output of

the CCDC module.

WEN

Alternately, the field identification input

signal is used by external device (AFE/TG)

to indicate the which of two frames is input

to the CCDC module for sensors with

interlaced output. CCDC handles 1- or

2-field sensors in hardware.

plus

GIO: GIO[083]

CCDC.MODE[7].CC

DMD &

CCDC.MODE[5].SW

PCLK / GIO082

I/O CCDC

/ GIO

V_{DD_VIN}

Pixel clock input (strobe for lines CI7 through PINMUX0[14].PCLK

YI0)

GIO: GIO[082]

YOUT7-R7

YOUT6-R6

YOUT5-R5

YOUT4-R4

YOUT3-R3

YOUT2-G7

YOUT1-G6

YOUT0-G5

I/O VENC

V_{DD_VOUT}

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine

function⁽⁴⁾

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine

function⁽⁴⁾

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine

function⁽⁴⁾

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine

function⁽⁴⁾

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine

function⁽⁴⁾

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine

function⁽⁴⁾

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine

function⁽⁴⁾

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine

function⁽⁴⁾

COUT7-G4 /

GIO081 / PWM0

I/O VENC

/ GIO /

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine PINMUX1[1:0].COU

function

T_7

PWM0

GIO: GIO[081]

PWM0

COUT6-G3 /

GIO080 / PWM1

I/O VENC

/ GIO /

V_{DD_VOUT}

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine PINMUX1[3:2].COU

function

T_6

PWM1

GIO: GIO[080]

PWM1⁽⁴⁾

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

COUT5-G2 /

GIO079 /

PWM2A / RTO0

I/O VENC

/ GIO /

V_{DD_VOUT}

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine PINMUX1[5:4].COU

function

T_5

PWM2

/ RTO

GIO: GIO[079]

PWM2A

RTO0⁽⁴⁾

COUT4-B7 /

GIO078 /

PWM2B / RTO1

I/O VENC

/ GIO /

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine PINMUX1[7:6].COU

function

T_4

PWM2

/ RTO

GIO: GIO[078]

PWM2B

RTO1⁽⁴⁾

COUT3-B6 /

GIO077 /

PWM2C / RTO2

I/O VENC

/ GIO /

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine PINMUX1[9:8].COU

function

T_3

PWM2

/ RTO

GIO: GIO[077]

PWM2C

RTO2⁽⁴⁾

COUT2-B5 /

GIO076 /

I/O VENC

/ GIO /

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine PINMUX1[11:10].CO

function

UT_2

PWM2D / RTO3

PWM2

/ RTO

GIO: GIO[076]

PWM2D

RTO3⁽⁴⁾

COUT1-B4 /

GIO075 /

PWM3A

I/O VENC

/ GIO /

V_{DD_VOUT}

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine PINMUX1[13:12].CO

function

UT_1

PWM3

GIO: GIO[075]

PWM3A⁽⁴⁾

COUT0-B3 /

GIO074 /

PWM3B

I/O VENC

/ GIO /

V_{DD_VOUT}

Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine PINMUX1[15:14].CO

function

UT_0

PWM3

GIO: GIO[074]

PWM3B⁽⁴⁾

HSYNC /

GIO073

I/O VENC

/ GIO

V_{DD_VOUT}

Video Encoder: Horizontal Sync

PINMUX1[16].HVSY

GIO: GIO[073]⁽⁴⁾

VSYNC /

GIO072

I/O VENC

/ GIO

Video Encoder: Vertical Sync

PINMUX1[16].HVSY

GIO: GIO[072]⁽⁴⁾

LCD_OE /

GIO071

I/O VENC

/ GIO

Video Encoder: LCD Output Enable or

BRIGHT signal

PINMUX1[17].DLCD

GIO: GIO[071]⁽⁴⁾

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

FIELD / GIO070

/ R2 / PWM3C

I/O VENC

/ GIO /

VENC

V_{DD_VOUT}

Video Encoder: Field identifier for interlaced PINMUX1[19:18].FI

display formats

ELD

PWM3

GIO: GIO[070]

Digital Video Out: R2

PWM3C⁽⁴⁾

EXTCLK /

GIO069 / B2 /

PWM3D

I/O VENC

/ GIO /

VENC

Video Encoder: External clock input, used if PINMUX1[21:20].EX

clock rates > 27 MHz are needed, e.g. 74.25 TCLK

MHz for HDTV digital output

PWM3

GIO: GIO[069]

Digital Video Out: B2

PWM3D⁽⁴⁾

VCLK / GIO068

I/O VENC

/ GIO

out L Video Encoder: Video Output Clock

PINMUX1[22].VCLK

GIO: GIO[068]⁽⁴⁾

VREF

IOUT

IBIAS

A I/O Video

DAC

Video DAC: Reference voltage output

(0.45V, 0.1uF to GND)

A I/O Video

DAC

Video DAC: Pre video buffer DAC output

(1000 ohm to VFB)

A I/O Video

DAC

Video DAC: External resistor (2550 Ohms to

GND) connection for current bias

configuration

VFB

A I/O Video

DAC

Video DAC: Pre video buffer DAC output

(1000 ohm to IOUT, 1070 ohm to TVOUT)

TVOUT

A I/O Video V_{DDA18_DAC}

DAC

Video DAC: Analog Composite NTSC/PAL

output (SeeFigure 5-31 andFigure 5-32 for

circuit connection)

V_{DDA18V_DAC}

V_{SSA_DAC}

PWR Video

DAC

Video DAC: Analog 1.8V power

GND Video

DAC

Video DAC: Analog 1.8V ground

DDR_CLK

DDR_RAS

DDR_CAS

DDR_WE

I/O DDR

V_{DD_DDR}

out L DDR Data Clock

out H DDR Complementary Data Clock

out H DDR Row Address Strobe

out H DDR Column Address Strobe

out H DDR Write Enable (active low)

out H DDR Chip Select (active low)

out L DDR Clock Enable

W10

DDR_CS

DDR_CKE

DDR_DQM[1]

V10

U15

out L Data mask outputs: DQM0: For

DDR_DQ[7:0]

DDR_DQM[0]

DDR_DQS[1]

T12

V15

I/O DDR

V_{DD_DDR}

out L Data mask outputs: DQM1: For

DDR_DQ[15:8]

Data strobe input/outputs for each byte of

the 16 bit data bus used to synchronize the

data transfers. Output to DDR when writing

and inputs when reading.

DQS1: For DDR_DQ[15:8]

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

DDR_DQS[0]

V12

I/O DDR

V_{DD_DDR}

Data strobe input/outputs for each byte of

the 16 bit data bus used to synchronize the

data transfers. Output to DDR when writing

and inputs when reading.

DQS0: For DDR_DQ[7:0]

DDR_BA[2]

DDR_BA[1]

DDR_BA[0]

I/O DDR

V_{DD_DDR}

out L Bank select outputs. Two are required for

1Gb DDR2 memories.

out L Bank select outputs. Two are required for

1Gb DDR2 memories.

out L Bank select outputs. Two are required for

1Gb DDR2 memories.

DDR_A13

I/O DDR

V_{DD_DDR}

out L DDR Address Bus bit 13

out L DDR Address Bus bit 12

out L DDR Address Bus bit 11

out L DDR Address Bus bit 10

out L DDR Address Bus bit 09

out L DDR Address Bus bit 08

out L DDR Address Bus bit 07

out L DDR Address Bus bit 06

out L DDR Address Bus bit 05

out L DDR Address Bus bit 04

out L DDR Address Bus bit 03

out L DDR Address Bus bit 02

out L DDR Address Bus bit 01

out L DDR Address Bus bit 00

DDR_A12

DDR_A11

DDR_A10

DDR_A09

DDR_A08

DDR_A07

DDR_A06

DDR_A05

DDR_A04

DDR_A03

DDR_A02

DDR_A01

DDR_A00

DDR_DQ15

DDR_DQ14

DDR_DQ13

DDR_DQ12

DDR_DQ11

DDR_DQ10

DDR_DQ09

DDR_DQ08

DDR_DQ07

DDR_DQ06

DDR_DQ05

DDR_DQ04

DDR_DQ03

DDR_DQ02

DDR_DQ01

DDR_DQ00

DDR_GATE0

W17

V16

W16

U16

W15

W14

V14

U13

W13

V13

W12

U12

T11

U11

W11

V11

W18

DDR Data Bus bit 15

DDR Data Bus bit 14

DDR Data Bus bit 13

DDR Data Bus bit 12

DDR Data Bus bit 11

DDR Data Bus bit 10

DDR Data Bus bit 09

DDR Data Bus bit 08

DDR Data Bus bit 07

DDR Data Bus bit 06

DDR Data Bus bit 05

DDR Data Bus bit 04

DDR Data Bus bit 03

DDR Data Bus bit 02

DDR Data Bus bit 01

DDR Data Bus bit 00

DDR: Loopback signal for external DQS

gating. Route to DDR and back to

DDR_STRBEN_DEL with same constraints

as used for DDR clock and data.

DDR_GATE1

V17

I/O DDR

V_{DD_DDR}

DDR: Loopback signal for external DQS

gating. Route to DDR and back to

DDR_STRBEN with same constraints as

used for DDR clock and data.

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

DDR_VREF

U10 PWR DDRI

V_{DD_DDR}

DDR: Voltage input for the SSTL_18 IO

buffers

V_{SSA_DLL}

R11 GND DDRD

V_{DD_DDR}

DDR: Ground for the DDR DLL

V_{DDA33_DDRDLL}

DDR_ZN

R10 PWR DDRD

DDR: Power (3.3 Volts) for the DDR DLL

I/O DDRI

DDR: Reference output for drive strength

calibration of N and P channel outputs. Tie

to ground via 50 ohm resistor @ 0.5%

tolerance.

EM_A13 /

GIO067 /

BTSEL[1]

V19

I/O AEMI

F /

V_DD

in L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[13]

PINMUX2[0].EM_A1

3_3,

GIO /

syste

GIO: GIO[067]

default set by

AECFG[0]

System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at

Power-on-Reset to determine Boot method

(00:NAND, 01:Flash, 10:UART, 11:SD)

EM_A12 /

GIO066 /

BTSEL[0]

U19

I/O AEMI

F /

in L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[12]

PINMUX2[0].EM_A1

3_3,

GIO /

syste

GIO: GIO[066]

default set by

AECFG[0]

System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at

Power-on-Reset to determine Boot method

(00:NAND, 01:Flash, 10:UART, 11:SD)

EM_A11 /

GIO065 /

AECFG[3]

R16

I/O AEMI

F /

in H Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[11]

PINMUX2[0].EM_A1

3_3,

GIO /

syste

GIO: GIO[065]

default set by

AECFG[0]

System: AECFG[3:0] sampled at

Power-on-Reset to set AEMIF Configuration

AECFG[3] sets default for

PinMux2.EM_D15_8: AEMIF Default Bus

Width (0:16 or 1:8 bits)

EM_A10 /

GIO064 /

AECFG[2]

R18

I/O AEMI

F /

V_DD

in H Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[10]

PINMUX2[0].EM_A1

3_3,

GIO /

syste

GIO: GIO[064]

default set by

AECFG[0]

System: AECFG[3:0] sampled at

Power-on-Reset to set AEMIF Configuration

AECFG[2:1] sets default for

PinMux2.EM_BA0: AEMIF EM_BA0

Definition (00: EM_BA0, 01: EM_A14,

10:GIO[054], 11:rsvd)

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

EM_A09 /

GIO063 /

AECFG[1]

P17

I/O AEMI

F /

V_DDPD in L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[09]

PINMUX2[0].EM_A1

3_3,

GIO /

syste

GIO: GIO[063]

default set by

AECFG[0]

System: AECFG[3:0] sampled at

Power-on-Reset to set AEMIF Configuration

AECFG[2:1] sets default for

PinMux2.EM_BA0: AEMIF EM_BA0

Definition (00: EM_BA0, 01: EM_A14,

10:GIO[054], 11:rsvd)

EM_A08 /

GIO062 /

AECFG[0]

T19

I/O AEMI

F /

V_DD

in H Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[08]

PINMUX2[0].EM_A1

3_3,

GIO /

syste

GIO: GIO[062]

default set by

AECFG[0]

AECFG[0] sets default for

- PinMux2.EM_A0_BA1: AEMIF Address

Width (OneNAND or NAND)

- PinMux2.EM_A13_3: AEMIF Address

Width (OneNAND or NAND)

(0:AEMIF address bits, 1:GIO[67:57])

out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[07]

EM_A07 /

GIO061

P16

P18

R19

P15

N18

N15

I/O AEMI

F /

V_DD

PINMUX2[0].EM_A1

3_3,

GIO

GIO: GIO[061] - Used by ROM Bootloader to default set by

provide progress status via LED (active low) AECFG[0]

EM_A06 /

GIO060

I/O AEMI

F /

out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[06]

PINMUX2[0].EM_A1

3_3,

GIO

GIO: GIO[060]

default set by

AECFG[0]

EM_A05 /

GIO059

I/O AEMI

F /

out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[05]

PINMUX2[0].EM_A1

3_3,

GIO

GIO: GIO[059]

default set by

AECFG[0]

EM_A04 /

GIO058

I/O AEMI

F /

out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[04]

PINMUX2[0].EM_A1

3_3,

GIO

GIO: GIO[058]

default set by

AECFG[0]

EM_A03 /

GIO057

I/O AEMI

F /

out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[03]

PINMUX2[0].EM_A1

3_3,

GIO

GIO: GIO[057]

default set by

AECFG[0]

EM_A02

I/O AEMI

out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[02]

NAND/SM/xD: CLE - Command Latch

Enable output

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

EM_A01

N17

I/O AEMI

V_DD

out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[01]

NAND/SM/xD: ALE - Address Latch Enable

output

EM_A00 /

GIO056

M16

I/O AEMI

F /

V_DD

out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[00] Note that

the EM_A0 is always a 32-bit address

PINMUX2[1].EM_A0

_BA1,

GIO

GIO: GIO[056]

default set by

AECFG[0]

EM_BA1 /

GIO055

P19

I/O AEMI

F /

V_DD

out H Async EMIF: Bank Address 1 signal = 16-bit PINMUX2[1].EM_A0

address.

_BA1,

GIO

In 16-bit mode, lowest address bit.

default set by

AECFG[0]

In 8-bit mode, second lowest address bit

GIO: GIO[055]

EM_BA0 /

GIO054 /

EM_A14

N19

I/O AEMI

F /

V_DD

out H Async EMIF: Bank Address 0 signal = 8-bit

address.

PINMUX2[3:2].EM_

BA0,

GIO /

EMIF2

.30

In 8-bit mode, lowest address bit.

default set by

AECFG[2:1]

Or, can be used as an extra Address line

(bit[14] when using 16-bit memories.

GIO: GIO[054]

EM_D15 /

GIO053

M18

M19

M15

L18

L17

L19

I/O AEMI

F /

V_DD

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[15]

PINMUX2[4].EM_D1

5_8,

GIO

GIO: GIO[053]

default set by

AECFG[3]

EM_D14 /

GIO052

I/O AEMI

F /

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[14]

PINMUX2[4].EM_D1

5_8,

GIO

GIO: GIO[052]

default set by

AECFG[3]

EM_D13 /

GIO051

I/O AEMI

F /

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[13]

PINMUX2[4].EM_D1

5_8,

GIO

GIO: GIO[051]

default set by

AECFG[3]

EM_D12 /

GIO050

I/O AEMI

F /

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[12]

PINMUX2[4].EM_D1

5_8,

GIO

GIO: GIO[050]

default set by

AECFG[3]

EM_D11 /

GIO049

I/O AEMI

F /

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[11]

PINMUX2[4].EM_D1

5_8,

GIO

GIO: GIO[049]

default set by

AECFG[3]

EM_D10 /

GIO048

I/O AEMI

F /

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[10]

PINMUX2[4].EM_D1

5_8,

GIO

GIO: GIO[048]

default set by

AECFG[3]

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

EM_D09 /

GIO047

K18

I/O AEMI

F /

V_DD

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[09]

PINMUX2[4].EM_D1

5_8,

GIO

GIO: GIO[047]

default set by

AECFG[3]

EM_D08 /

GIO046

L16

I/O AEMI

F /

V_DD

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[08]

PINMUX2[4].EM_D1

5_8,

GIO

GIO: GIO[046]

default set by

AECFG[3]

EM_D07 /

GIO045

K19

K17

J19

L15

J18

H19

J17

H18

J16

I/O AEMI

F /

V_DD

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[07]

PINMUX2[5].EM_D7

GIO

GIO: GIO[045]

EM_D06 /

GIO044

I/O AEMI

F /

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[06]

PINMUX2[5].EM_D7

GIO

GIO: GIO[044]

EM_D05 /

GIO043

I/O AEMI

F /

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[05]

PINMUX2[5].EM_D7

GIO

GIO: GIO[043]

EM_D04 /

GIO042

I/O AEMI

F /

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[04]

PINMUX2[5].EM_D7

GIO

GIO: GIO[042]

EM_D03 /

GIO041

I/O AEMI

F /

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[03]

PINMUX2[5].EM_D7

GIO

GIO: GIO[041]

EM_D02 /

GIO040

I/O AEMI

F /

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[02]

PINMUX2[5].EM_D7

GIO

GIO: GIO[040]

EM_D01 /

GIO039

I/O AEMI

F /

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[01]

PINMUX2[5].EM_D7

GIO

GIO: GIO[039]

EM_D00 /

GIO038

I/O AEMI

F /

Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[00]

PINMUX2[5].EM_D7

GIO

GIO: GIO[038]

EM_CE0 /

GIO037

I/O AEMI

F /

out H Async EMIF: Lowest numbered Chip Select. PINMUX2[6].EM_CE

Can be programmed to be used for standard

asynchronous memories (example:flash),

OneNand or NAND memory. Used for the

default boot and ROM boot modes.

GIO

GIO: GIO[037]

EM_CE1 /

GIO036

G19

I/O AEMI

F /

V_DD

out H Async EMIF: Second Chip Select., Can be

programmed to be used for standard

asynchronous memories (example: flash),

OneNand or NAND memory.

PINMUX2[7].EM_CE

GIO

GIO: GIO[036]

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

EM_WE /

GIO035

J15

F19

G18

I/O AEMI

F /

V_DD

out H Async EMIF: Write Enable

PINMUX2[8].EM_W

E_OE

GIO

NAND/SM/xD: WE (Write Enable) output

GIO: GIO[035]

EM_OE /

GIO034

I/O AEMI

F /

out H Async EMIF: Output Enable

PINMUX2[8].EM_W

E_OE

GIO

NAND/SM/xD: RE (Read Enable) output

GIO: GIO[034]

EM_WAIT /

GIO033

I/O AEMI

F /

in H Async EMIF: Async WAIT

PINMUX2[9].EM_W

AIT

GIO

NAND/SM/xD: RDY/_BSY input

GIO: GIO[033]

EM_ADV /

GIO032

H16

E19

H15

F18

G17

E18

F17

F16

I/O AEMI

F /

V_DD

in L OneNAND: Address Valid Detect for

OneNAND interface

PINMUX2[10].EM_A

GIO

GIO: GIO[032]

EM_CLK /

GIO031

I/O AEMI

F /

out L OneNAND: Clock signal for OneNAND flash PINMUX2[11].EM_C

interface

GIO

GIO: GIO[031]

ASP0_DX /

GIO030

I/O ASP5

120 /

ASP0: Transmit Data

PINMUX3[0].GIO30

GIO

GIO: GIO[030]

ASP0_CLKX /

GIO029

I/O ASP5

120 /

ASP0: Transmit Clock

PINMUX3[1].GIO29

PINMUX3[2].GIO28

PINMUX3[3].GIO27

PINMUX3[4].GIO26

PINMUX3[5].GIO25

PINMUX3[6].GIO24

PINMUX3[7].GIO23

GIO

GIO: GIO[029]

ASP0_FSX /

GIO028

I/O ASP5

120 /

ASP0: Transmit Frame Synch

GIO

GIO: GIO[028]

ASP0_DR /

GIO027

I/O ASP5

120 /

ASP0: Receive Data

GIO

GIO: GIO[027]

ASP0_CLKR /

GIO026

I/O ASP5

120 /

ASP0: Receive Clock

GIO

GIO: GIO[026]

ASP0_FSR /

GIO025

I/O ASP5

120 /

ASP0: Receive Frame Synch

GIO

GIO: GIO[025]

MMCSD1_CLK / C15

GIO024

I/O MMC

SD /

MMCSD1: Clock

GIO

GIO: GIO[024]

MMCSD1_CMD

/ GIO023

A17

I/O MMC

SD /

MMCSD1: Command

GIO

GIO: GIO[023]

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

MMCSD1_DAT

A3 / GIO022 /

UART2_RTS

B16

A16

B15

A18

I/O MMC

SD /

V_DD

MMCSD1: DATA3

PINMUX3[9:8].GIO2

GIO /

UART

GIO: GIO[022]

UART2: RTS

MMCSD1_DAT

A2 / GIO021 /

UART2_CTS

I/O MMC

SD /

MMCSD1: DATA2

PINMUX3[11:10].GI

O21

GIO /

UART

GIO: GIO[021]

UART2: CTS

MMCSD1_DAT

A1 / GIO020 /

UART2_RXD

I/O MMC

SD /

MMCSD1: DATA1

PINMUX3[13:12].GI

O20

GIO /

UART

GIO: GIO[020]

UART2: Receive Data

MMCSD1: DATA0

MMCSD1_DAT

A0 / GIO019 /

UART2_TXD

I/O MMC

SD /

PINMUX3[15:14].GI

O19

GIO /

UART

GIO: GIO[019]

UART2: Transmit Data

CLKOUT: Output Clock 1

CLKOUT1 /

GIO018

D12

A11

C11

R13

R14

R15

I/O Clocks

/ GIO

V_DD

PINMUX3[16].GIO1

GIO: GIO[018]

CLKOUT2 /

GIO017

I/O Clocks

/ GIO

CLKOUT: Output Clock 2

PINMUX3[17].GIO1

GIO: GIO[017]

CLKOUT3 /

GIO016

I/O Clocks

/ GIO

CLKOUT: Output Clock 3

PINMUX3[18].GIO1

GIO: GIO[016]

I2C: Serial Data

I2C_SDA /

GIO015

I/O I2C /

GIO

PINMUX3[19].GIO1

GIO: GIO[015]

I2C_SCL /

GIO014

I/O I2C /

GIO

I2C: Serial Clock

PINMUX3[20].GIO1

GIO: GIO[014]

UART1_RXD /

GIO013

I/O UART

UART1: Receive Data

PINMUX3[21].GIO1

1 /

GIO

GIO: GIO[013]

UART1_TXD /

GIO012

R17

E13

I/O UART

V_DD

UART1: Transmit Data

PINMUX3[22].GIO1

1 /

GIO

GIO: GIO[012]

SPI1_SDENA[0]

/ GIO011

I/O SPI1 /

GIO

V_DD

SPI1: Chip Select 0

PINMUX3[23].GIO1

GIO: GIO[011]

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

SPI1_SCLK /

GIO010

C13

I/O SPI1 /

GIO

V_DD

SPI1: Clock

PINMUX3[24].GIO1

GIO: GIO[010]

SPI1_SDI /

GIO009 /

A13

I/O SPI1 /

GIO /

V_DD

SPI1: Data In -OR- SPI1: Chip Select 1

PINMUX3[26:25].GI

SPI1_SDENA[1]

SPI1

GIO: GIO[009]

SPI1: Data Out

SPI1_SDO /

GIO008

E12

C17

I/O SPI1 /

GIO

V_DD

PINMUX3[27].GIO8

PINMUX3[28].GIO7

GIO: GIO[008]

GIO: GIO[007]

GIO007 /

SPI0_SDENA[1]

I/O GIO

debou

nce /

V_DD

SPI0

SPI0: Chip Select 1

GIO: GIO[006]

GIO006

GIO005

GIO004

GIO003

GIO002

GIO001

GIO000

B18

D15

B17

G15

F15

E14

C16

I/O GIO

debou

nce

V_DD

I/O GIO

debou

nce

GIO: GIO[005]

GIO: GIO[004]

GIO: GIO[003]

GIO: GIO[002]

GIO: GIO[001]

GIO: GIO[000]

I/O GIO

debou

nce

I/O GIO

debou

nce

I/O GIO

debou

nce

I/O GIO

debou

nce

I/O GIO

debou

nce

USB_DP

USB_DM

USB_R1

A I/O USBP V_{DDA33_USB}

USB D+ (differential signal pair)

USB D- (differential signal pair)

USB Reference current output

A I/O USBP V_{DDA33_USB}

A I/O USBP

Connect to V_{SS_USB_REF}via 10K Ω ±1%

resistor placed as close to the device as

possible.

USB_ID

A I/O USBP V_{DDA33_USB}

USB operating mode identification pin

For Device mode operation only, pull up this

pin to VDD with a 1.5K ohm resistor.

For Host mode operation only, pull down this

pin to ground (VSS) with a 1.5K ohm

resistor.

If using an OTG or mini-USB connector, this

pin will be set properly via the

cable/connector configuration.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

USB_VBUS

A I/O USBP

For host or device mode operation, tie the

VBUS/USB power signal to the USB

connector.

When used in OTG mode operation, tie

VBUS to the external charge pump and to

the VBUS signal on the USB connector.

When the USB is not used, tie VBUS to

V_{SS_USB}

USB_DRVVBU

USBP

V_DD

Digital output to control external 5 V supply

V_{SS_USB_REF}

GND USBP

USB Ground Reference

Connect directly to ground and to USB_R1

via

10K Ω ±1% resistor placed as close to the

device as possible.

V_{DDA33_USB}

V_{SS_USB}

V_{DDA33_USB_PLL}

V_{SS_USB}

V_{DDA13_USB}

V_{SS_USB}

PWR USBP

V_DD

Analog 3.3 V power USB PHY (Transceiver)

GND USBP

Analog 3.3 V ground for USB PHY

(Transceiver)

PWR USBP

Common mode 3.3 V power for USB PHY

(PLL)

GND USBP

Common mode 3.3 V ground for USB PHY

(PLL)

PWR USBP

Analog 1.3 V power for USB PHY

Analog 1.3 V ground for USB PHY

Digital 1.3 V power for USB PHY

GND USBP

V_{DDD13_USB}

MMCSD0_CLK

MMCSD0_CMD

PWR USBP

A15

C14

A14

B13

D14

B14

U18

I/O MMC

SD0

V_DD

out L MMCSD0: Clock

PINMUX4[2].MMCS

D0_MS

I/O MMC

SD0

MMCSD0: Command

MMCSD0: DATA3

PINMUX4[2].MMCS

D0_MS

MMCSD0_DAT

I/O MMC

SD0

PINMUX4[2].MMCS

D0_MS

MMCSD0_DAT

I/O MMC

SD0

MMCSD0: DATA2

PINMUX4[2].MMCS

D0_MS

MMCSD0_DAT

I/O MMC

SD0

MMCSD0: DATA1

PINMUX4[2].MMCS

D0_MS

MMCSD0_DAT

I/O MMC

SD0

MMCSD0: DATA0

PINMUX4[2].MMCS

D0_MS

UART0_RXD

UART

UART0: Receive Data

Used for UART boot mode

UART0_TXD

T18

B12

UART

V_DD

out H UART0: Transmit Data

Used for UART boot mode

SPI0_SDENA[0]

/ GIO103

I/O SPI0 /

GIO

V_DD

SPI0: Enable / Chip Select 0

PINMUX4[0].SPI0_S

DENA

GIO: GIO[103]

SPI0: Clock

SPI0_SCLK

C12

A12

I/O SPI0

V_DD

SPI0_SDI /

GIO102

I/O SPI0 /

GIO

SPI0: Data In

PINMUX4[1].SPI0_S

GIO: GIO[102]

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

SPI0_SDO

B11

C18

I/O SPI0

V_DD

SPI0: Data Out

ASP1_DX

I/O ASP5

121

ASP1: Transmit Data

ASP1_CLKX

ASP1_FSX

ASP1_DR

D19

E16

C19

D18

E17

D17

I/O ASP5

121

V_DD

ASP1: Transmit Clock

ASP1: Transmit Frame Sync

ASP1: Receive Data

I/O ASP5

121

I/O ASP5

121

ASP1_CLKR

ASP1_FSR

ASP1_CLKS

I/O ASP5

121

ASP1: Receive Clock

ASP1: Receive Frame Synch

ASP1: Master Clock

I/O ASP5

121

ASP5

121

RESET

MXI1

D11

V_DD

Global Chip Reset (active low)

Clocks

Crystal input for system oscillator (24 MHz)

Output for system oscillator (24 MHz)

MXO1

MXI2

out

Crystal input for video oscillator (27 MHz).

This crystal is not required

V_DD

MXO2

Clocks

V_DD

out

Output for video oscillator (27 MHz). This

crystal is not required.

V_DD

TCK

E10

EMUL

ATIO

V_DD

JTAG test clock input

TDI

EMUL

ATIO

JTAG test data input

TDO

TMS

TRST

RTCK

EMU0

EMUL

ATIO

out L JTAG test data output

E11

EMUL

ATIO

JTAG test mode select

EMUL

ATIO

JTAG test logic reset (active low)

EMUL

ATIO

out L JTAG test clock output

I/O EMUL

JTAG emulation 0 I/O

ATIO

V_DD

EMU1

I/O EMUL

V_DD

JTAG emulation 1 I/O

ATIO

EMU[1:0] = 00 - Force Debug Scan chain

(ARM and ARM ETB TAPs connected)

EMU[1:0] = 11 - Normal Scan chain (ICEpick

only)

RSV01

RSV02

I/O/Z

Reserved. This signal should be left as a No

Connect or connected to V_SS

Reserved. This signal should be left as a No

Connect or connected to V_SS

I/O/Z

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

RSV03

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

I/O/Z

Reserved. This signal should be left as a No

Connect or connected to V_SS

Reserved. This signal should be left as a No

Connect or connected to V_SS

Reserved. This signal should be connected

to V_SS

Reserved. This signal should be connected

to V_SS

Reserved. This signal should be connected

to V_SS

RSV04

RSV05

RSV06

RSV07

I/O/Z

PWR

GND

No connect

V_{DD_VIN}

V_{DD_VOUT}

V_{DD_DDR}

V_{DDA_PLL1}

V_{DDA_PLL2}

CV_DD

PWR

Power for Digital Video Input IO (3.3 V)

Power for Digital Video Output IO (3.3 V)

Power for DDR I/O (1.8 V)

Analog Power for PLL1 (1.3 V)

Analog Power for PLL2 (1.3 V)

Core power (1.3 V)

P10 PWR

P11 PWR

P12 PWR

P13 PWR

P14 PWR

PWR

R12 PWR

T14 PWR

G12 PWR

PWR

CV_DD

A10 PWR

B19 PWR

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

PWR

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

G11 PWR

H10 PWR

H13 PWR

H17 PWR

J11 PWR

J12 PWR

J13 PWR

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

PWR

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

K11 PWR

K12 PWR

L11 PWR

L12 PWR

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

PWR

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

Core power (1.3 V)

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

CV_DD

PWR

Core power (1.3 V)

CV_DD

V_DD

T17 PWR

W19 PWR

Core power (1.3 V)

Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)

System oscillator (24 MHz) - ground

Video oscillator (27 MHz) - ground

Analog Ground for PLL1

Analog Ground for PLL2

Digital ground

PWR

V_DD

F10 PWR

F11 PWR

F12 PWR

F13 PWR

F14 PWR

V_DD

G14 PWR

K8 PWR

K15 PWR

L6 PWR

PWR

V_DD

L13 PWR

M10 PWR

M11 PWR

M12 PWR

M13 PWR

N11 PWR

N12 PWR

C10 GND

V_DD

V_{SS_MX1}

V_{SS_MX2}

V_{SSA_PLL1}

V_{SSA_PLL2}

V_SS

GND

H12 GND

GND

V_SS

Digital ground

V_SS

A19 GND

Digital ground

V_SS

GND

Digital ground

V_SS

Digital ground

V_SS

B10 GND

Digital ground

V_SS

GND

Digital ground

V_SS

Digital ground

V_SS

E15 GND

Digital ground

V_SS

GND

Digital ground

V_SS

Digital ground

V_SS

Digital ground

V_SS

Digital ground

V_SS

Digital ground

V_SS

H11 GND

H14 GND

Digital ground

V_SS

Digital ground

V_SS

GND

Digital ground

V_SS

Digital ground

V_SS

J10

J14

Digital ground

V_SS

Digital ground

V_SS

Digital ground

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)

Name

BGA Type Group

Power

PU Reset

Description⁽⁴⁾

Mux Control

(1)

Supply⁽²⁾PD⁽³⁾State

V_SS

GND

Digital ground

K10 GND

K14 GND

GND

L10

L14

M14 GND

M17 GND

GND

N14 GND

GND

T15 GND

GND

U14 GND

U17 GND

V18 GND

W1 GND

GND

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

2.6 Device Support

2.6.1 Development Tools

TI offers an extensive line of development tools for DM355 systems, including tools to evaluate the

performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm implementations, and fully integrate and

debug software and hardware modules. The tools support documentation is electronically available within

the Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE).

The following products support development of DM355 based applications:

Software Development Tools:

Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE): including Editor

C/C++/Assembly Code Generation, and Debug plus additional development tools

Hardware Development Tools:

Extended Development System (XDS™) Emulator (supports TMS320DM355 DMSoC multiprocessor

system debug) EVM (Evaluation Module)

For a complete listing of development-support tools for the TMS320DM355 DMSoC platform, visit the

Texas Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com. For information on pricing and

availability, contact the nearest TI field sales office or authorized distributor.

2.6.2 Device Nomenclature

To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all

DSP devices and support tools. Each DSP commercial family member has one of three prefixes: TMX,

TMP, or TMS (e.g., ). Texas Instruments recommends two of three possible prefix designators for its

support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary stages of product development

from engineering prototypes (TMX/TMDX) through fully qualified production devices/tools (TMS/TMDS).

Device development evolutionary flow:

TMX

TMP

TMS

Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device's electrical

specifications.

Final silicon die that conforms to the device's electrical specifications but has not completed

quality and reliability verification.

Fully-qualified production device.

Support tool development evolutionary flow:

TMDX

Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal

qualification testing.

TMDS

Fully qualified development-support product.

TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped against the following

disclaimer:

"Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes."

TMS devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and

reliability of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI's standard warranty applies.

Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard

production devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production

system because their expected end-use failure rate is undefined. Only qualified production devices are to

be used in production.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the

package type (for example, ZCE), the temperature range (for example, "Blank" is the commercial

temperature range), and the device speed range in megahertz (for example, 202 is 202.5 MHz). The

following figure provides a legend for reading the complete device name for any TMS320DM355 DMSoC

platform member.

(

)

TMX 320 DM355

ZCE 216

PREFIX

SPEED GRADE

216 MHz

270 MHz

TMX= Experimental device

TMS= Qualified device

(A)

PACKAGE TYPE

ZCE = 337-pin plastic BGA, with Pb-free soldered balls

DEVICE FAMILY

320 = TMS320 DSP family

SILICON REVISION

(B)

DEVICE

Blank = Initial Silicon1.1

DM355

A. BGA = Ball Grid Array

Figure 2-5. Device Nomenclature

2.6.3 Device Documentation

2.6.3.1 Related Documentation From Texas Instruments

The following documents describe the TMS320DM355 Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). Copies of

these documents are available on the internet at www.ti.com. Contact your TI representative for Extranet

access.

SPRS463

TMS320DM355 Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC) Data Manual This document

describes the overall TMS320DM355 system, including device architecture and features,

memory map, pin descriptions, timing characteristics and requirements, device mechanicals,

etc.

SPRZ264

TMS320DM355 DMSoC Silicon Errata Describes the known exceptions to the functional

specifications for the TMS320DM355 DMSoC.

SPRUFB3 TMS320DM355 ARM Subsystem Reference Guide This document describes the ARM

Subsystem in the TMS320DM355 Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The ARM

subsystem is designed to give the ARM926EJ-S (ARM9) master control of the device. In

general, the ARM is responsible for configuration and control of the device; including the

components of the ARM Subsystem, the peripherals, and the external memories.

SPRUED1 TMS320DM35x DMSoC Asynchronous External Memory Interface (EMIF) Reference

Guide This document describes the asynchronous external memory interface (EMIF) in the

TMS320DM35x Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The EMIF supports a glueless

interface to a variety of external devices.

SPRUED2 TMS320DM35x DMSoC Universal Serial Bus (USB) Controller Reference Guide This

document describes the universal serial bus (USB) controller in the TMS320DM35x Digital

Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The USB controller supports data throughput rates up to

480 Mbps. It provides a mechanism for data transfer between USB devices and also

supports host negotiation.

SPRUED3 TMS320DM35x DMSoC Audio Serial Port (ASP) Reference Guide This document

describes the operation of the audio serial port (ASP) audio interface in the TMS320DM35x

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The primary audio modes that are supported by the

ASP are the AC97 and IIS modes. In addition to the primary audio modes, the ASP supports

general serial port receive and transmit operation, but is not intended to be used as a

high-speed interface.

SPRUED4 TMS320DM35x DMSoC Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Reference Guide This document

describes the serial peripheral interface (SPI) in the TMS320DM35x Digital Media

System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The SPI is a high-speed synchronous serial input/output port that

allows a serial bit stream of programmed length (1 to 16 bits) to be shifted into and out of the

device at a programmed bit-transfer rate. The SPI is normally used for communication

between the DMSoC and external peripherals. Typical applications include an interface to

external I/O or peripheral expansion via devices such as shift registers, display drivers, SPI

EPROMs and analog-to-digital converters.

SPRUED9 TMS320DM35x DMSoC Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)

Reference Guide This document describes the universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter

(UART) peripheral in the TMS320DM35x Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The

UART peripheral performs serial-to-parallel conversion on data received from a peripheral

device, and parallel-to-serial conversion on data received from the CPU.

SPRUEE0 TMS320DM35x DMSoC Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Peripheral Reference Guide This

document describes the inter-integrated circuit (I2C) peripheral in the TMS320DM35x Digital

Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The I2C peripheral provides an interface between the

DMSoC and other devices compliant with the I2C-bus specification and connected by way of

an I2C-bus. External components attached to this 2-wire serial bus can transmit and receive

up to 8-bit wide data to and from the DMSoC through the I2C peripheral. This document

assumes the reader is familiar with the I2C-bus specification.

SPRUEE2 TMS320DM35x DMSoC Multimedia Card (MMC)/Secure Digital (SD) Card Controller

Reference Guide This document describes the multimedia card (MMC)/secure digital (SD)

card controller in the TMS320DM35x Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The MMC/SD

card is used in a number of applications to provide removable data storage. The MMC/SD

controller provides an interface to external MMC and SD cards. The communication between

the MMC/SD controller and MMC/SD card(s) is performed by the MMC/SD protocol.

SPRUEE4 TMS320DM35x DMSoC Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA) Controller Reference

Guide This document describes the operation of the enhanced direct memory access

(EDMA3) controller in the TMS320DM35x Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The

EDMA controller's primary purpose is to service user-programmed data transfers between

two memory-mapped slave endpoints on the DMSoC.

SPRUEE5 TMS320DM35x DMSoC 64-bit Timer Reference Guide This document describes the

operation of the software-programmable 64-bit timers in the TMS320DM35x Digital Media

System-on-Chip (DMSoC). Timer 0, Timer 1, and Timer 3 are used as general-purpose (GP)

timers and can be programmed in 64-bit mode, dual 32-bit unchained mode, or dual 32-bit

chained mode; Timer 2 is used only as a watchdog timer. The GP timer modes can be used

to generate periodic interrupts or enhanced direct memory access (EDMA) synchronization

events and Real Time Output (RTO) events (Timer 3 only). The watchdog timer mode is

used to provide a recovery mechanism for the device in the event of a fault condition, such

as a non-exiting code loop.

SPRUEE6 TMS320DM35x DMSoC General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Reference Guide This

document describes the general-purpose input/output (GPIO) peripheral in the

TMS320DM35x Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The GPIO peripheral provides

dedicated general-purpose pins that can be configured as either inputs or outputs. When

configured as an input, you can detect the state of the input by reading the state of an

internal register. When configured as an output, you can write to an internal register to

control the state driven on the output pin.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Overview

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

SPRUEE7 TMS320DM35x DMSoC Pulse-Width Modulator (PWM) Reference Guide This document

describes the pulse-width modulator (PWM) peripheral in the TMS320DM35x Digital Media

System-on-Chip (DMSoC).

SPRUEH7 TMS320DM35x DMSoC DDR2/Mobile DDR (DDR2/mDDR) Memory Controller Reference

Guide This document describes the DDR2 / mobile DDR memory controller in the

TMS320DM35x Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The DDR2 / mDDR memory

controller is used to interface with JESD79D-2A standard compliant DDR2 SDRAM and

mobile DDR devices.

SPRUF71 TMS320DM35x DMSoC Video Processing Front End (VPFE) Users Guide This document

describes the Video Processing Front End (VPFE) in the TMS320DM35x Digital Media

System-on-Chip (DMSoC).

SPRUF72 TMS320DM35x DMSoC Video Processing Back End (VPBE) Users Guide This document

describes the Video Processing Back End (VPBE) in the TMS320DM35x Digital Media

System-on-Chip (DMSoC).

SPRUF74 TMS320DM35x DMSoC Real Time Out (RTO) Controller Reference Guide This document

describes the Real Time Out (RTO) controller in the TMS320DM35x Digital Media

System-on-Chip (DMSoC).

SPRUFC8 TMS320DM355 DMSoC Peripherals Overview Reference Guide This document provides

an overview of the peripherals in the TMS320DM355 Digital Media System-on-Chip

(DMSoC).

The following documents describe TMS320DM35x Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC) that are not

available by literature number. Copies of these documents are available (by title only) on the internet at

www.ti.com. Contact your TI representative for Extranet access.

TMS320DM35x DDR2 / mDDR Board Design Application Note This provides board

design recommendations and guidelines for DDR2 and mobile DDR.

TMS320DM35x USB Board Design and Layout Guidelines Application Note This

provides board design recommendations and guidelines for high speed USB.

Device Overview

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

3 Detailed Device Description

This section provides a detailed overview of the DM355 device.

3.1 ARM Subsystem Overview

The ARM Subsystem contains components required to provide the ARM926EJ-S (ARM) master control of

the overall DM355 system, including the components of the ARM Subsystem, the peripherals, and the

external memories.

The ARM is responsible for handling system functions such as system-level initialization, configuration,

user interface, user command execution, connectivity functions, interface and control of the subsystem,

etc. The ARM is master and performs these functions because it has a large program memory space and

fast context switching capability, and is thus suitable for complex, multi-tasking, and general-purpose

control tasks.

3.1.1 Components of the ARM Subsystem

The ARM Subsystem in DM355 consists of the following components:

•

ARM926EJ-S RISC processor, including:

–

coprocessor 15 (CP15)

MMU

16KB Instruction cache

8KB Data cache

Write Buffer

Java accelerator

•

ARM Internal Memories

–

32KB Internal RAM (32-bit wide access)

8KB Internal ROM (ARM bootloader for non-AEMIF boot options)

•

Embedded Trace Module and Embedded Trace Buffer (ETM/ETB)

System Control Peripherals

–

ARM Interrupt Controller

PLL Controller

Power and Sleep Controller

System Control Module

The ARM also manages/controls all the device peripherals:

•

DDR2 / mDDR EMIF Controller

AEMIF Controller, including the OneNAND and NAND flash interface

Enhanced DMA (EDMA)

UART

Timers

Real Time Out (RTO)

Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)

Inter-IC Communication (I2C)

Multi-Media Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD)

Audio Serial Port (ASP)

Universal Serial Bus Controller (USB)

Serial Port Interface (SPI)

Video Processing Front End (VPFE)

–

CCD Controller (CCDC)

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

–

Image Pipe (IPIPE)

H3A Engine (Hardware engine for computing Auto-focus, Auto white balance, and Auto exposure)

•

Video Processing Back End (VPBE)

–

On Screen Display (OSD)

Video Encoder Engine (VENC)

Figure 3-1 shows the functional block diagram of the DM355 ARM Subsystem.

ARM

Master

interrupt

controller

(AINTC)

Master IF

Arbiter

I-AHB

D-AHB

System

control

I-TCM

D-TCM

Slave

ARM926EJ-S

Arbiter

PLLC2

PLLC1

Power

sleep

16K I$

8K D$

CP15

MMU

16K

controller

(PSC)

ROM

RAM1 RAM0

Peripherals

...

Figure 3-1. DM355 ARM Subsystem Block Diagram

3.2 ARM926EJ-S RISC CPU

The ARM Subsystem integrates the ARM926EJ-S processor. The ARM926EJ-S processor is a member of

ARM9 family of general-purpose microprocessors. This processor is targeted at multi-tasking applications

where full memory management, high performance, low die size, and low power are all important. The

ARM926EJ-S processor supports the 32-bit ARM and 16 bit THUMB instruction sets, enabling the user to

trade off between high performance and high code density. Specifically, the ARM926EJ-S processor

supports the ARMv5TEJ instruction set, which includes features for efficient execution of Java byte codes,

providing Java performance similar to Just in Time (JIT) Java interpreter, but without associated code

overhead.

The ARM926EJ-S processor supports the ARM debug architecture and includes logic to assist in both

hardware and software debug. The ARM926EJ-S processor has a Harvard architecture and provides a

complete high performance subsystem, including:

•

ARM926EJ -S integer core

CP15 system control coprocessor

Memory Management Unit (MMU)

Separate instruction and data Caches

Write buffer

Separate instruction and data Tightly-Coupled Memories (TCMs) [internal RAM] interfaces

Separate instruction and data AHB bus interfaces

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

•

Embedded Trace Module and Embedded Trace Buffer (ETM/ETB)

For more complete details on the ARM9, refer to the ARM926EJ-S Technical Reference Manual, available

at http://www.arm.com

3.2.1 CP15

The ARM926EJ-S system control coprocessor (CP15) is used to configure and control instruction and

data caches, Tightly-Coupled Memories (TCMs), Memory Management Unit (MMU), and other ARM

subsystem functions. The CP15 registers are programmed using the MRC and MCR ARM instructions,

when the ARM in a privileged mode such as supervisor or system mode.

3.2.2 MMU

The ARM926EJ-S MMU provides virtual memory features required by operating systems such as Linux,

WindowCE, ultron, ThreadX, etc. A single set of two level page tables stored in main memory is used to

control the address translation, permission checks and memory region attributes for both data and

instruction accesses. The MMU uses a single unified Translation Lookaside Buffer (TLB) to cache the

information held in the page tables. The MMU features are:

•

Standard ARM architecture v4 and v5 MMU mapping sizes, domains and access protection scheme.

Mapping sizes are:

–

1MB (sections)

64KB (large pages)

4KB (small pages)

1KB (tiny pages)

•

Access permissions for large pages and small pages can be specified separately for each quarter of

the page (subpage permissions)

•

Hardware page table walks

Invalidate entire TLB, using CP15 register 8

Invalidate TLB entry, selected by MVA, using CP15 register 8

Lockdown of TLB entries, using CP15 register 10

3.2.3 Caches and Write Buffer

The size of the Instruction Cache is 16KB, Data cache is 8KB. Additionally, the Caches have the following

features:

•

Virtual index, virtual tag, and addressed using the Modified Virtual Address (MVA)

Four-way set associative, with a cache line length of eight words per line (32-bytes per line) and with

two dirty bits in the Dcache

•

Dcache supports write-through and write-back (or copy back) cache operation, selected by memory

region using the C and B bits in the MMU translation tables.

•

Critical-word first cache refilling

Cache lockdown registers enable control over which cache ways are used for allocation on a line fill,

providing a mechanism for both lockdown, and controlling cache corruption

•

Dcache stores the Physical Address TAG (PA TAG) corresponding to each Dcache entry in the TAG

RAM for use during the cache line write-backs, in addition to the Virtual Address TAG stored in the

TAG RAM. This means that the MMU is not involved in Dcache write-back operations, removing the

possibility of TLB misses related to the write-back address.

•

Cache maintenance operations provide efficient invalidation of, the entire Dcache or Icache, regions of

the Dcache or Icache, and regions of virtual memory.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

The write buffer is used for all writes to a noncachable bufferable region, write-through region and write

misses to a write-back region. A separate buffer is incorporated in the Dcache for holding write-back for

cache line evictions or cleaning of dirty cache lines. The main write buffer has 16-word data buffer and a

four-address buffer. The Dcache write-back has eight data word entries and a single address entry.

3.2.4 Tightly Coupled Memory (TCM)

ARM internal RAM is provided for storing real-time and performance-critical code/data and the Interrupt

Vector table. ARM internal ROM enables non-AEMIF boot options, such as NAND, UART, and HPI. The

RAM and ROM memories interfaced to the ARM926EJ-S via the tightly coupled memory interface that

provides for separate instruction and data bus connections. Since the ARM TCM does not allow

instructions on the D-TCM bus or data on the I-TCM bus, an arbiter is included so that both data and

instructions can be stored in the internal RAM/ROM. The arbiter also allows accesses to the RAM/ROM

from extra-ARM sources (e.g., EDMA or other masters). The ARM926EJ-S has built-in DMA support for

direct accesses to the ARM internal memory from a non-ARM master. Because of the time-critical nature

of the TCM link to the ARM internal memory, all accesses from non-ARM devices are treated as DMA

transfers.

Instruction and Data accesses are differentiated via accessing different memory map regions, with the

instruction region from 0x0000 through 0x7FFF and data from 0x10000 through 0x17FFF. Placing the

instruction region at 0x0000 is necessary to allow the ARM Interrupt Vector table to be placed at 0x0000,

as required by the ARM architecture. The internal 32-KB RAM is split into two physical banks of 16KB

each, which allows simultaneous instruction and data accesses to be accomplished if the code and data

are in separate banks.

3.2.5 Advanced High-performance Bus (AHB)

The ARM Subsystem uses the AHB port of the ARM926EJ-S to connect the ARM to the configuration bus

and the external memories. Arbiters are employed to arbitrate access to the separate D-AHB and I-AHB

by the configuration bus and the external memories bus.

3.2.6 Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM) and Embedded Trace Buffer (ETB)

To support real-time trace, the ARM926EJ-S processor provides an interface to enable connection of an

Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM). The ARM926ES-J Subsystem in DM355 also includes the Embedded

Trace Buffer (ETB). The ETM consists of two parts:

•

Trace Port provides real-time trace capability for the ARM9.

Triggering facilities provide trigger resources, which include address and data comparators, counter,

and sequencers.

The DM355 trace port is not pinned out and is instead only connected to the Embedded Trace Buffer. The

ETB has a 4KB buffer memory. ETB enabled debug tools are required to read/interpret the captured trace

data.

3.3 Memory Mapping

The ARM memory map is shown in Table 2-2 and Table 2-3. This section describes the memories and

interfaces within the ARM's memory map.

3.3.1 ARM Internal Memories

The ARM has access to the following ARM internal memories:

•

32KB ARM Internal RAM on TCM interface, logically separated into two 16KB pages to allow

simultaneous access on any given cycle if there are separate accesses for code (I-TCM bus) and data

(D-TCM) to the different memory regions.

•

8KB ARM Internal ROM

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

3.3.2 External Memories

The ARM has access to the following External memories:

•

DDR2 / mDDR Synchronous DRAM

Asynchronous EMIF / OneNAND

NAND Flash

Flash card devices:

–

MMC/SD

SmartMedia

3.3.3 Peripherals

The ARM has access to all of the peripherals on the device.

3.4 ARM Interrupt Controller (AINTC)

The DM355 ARM Interrupt Controller (AINTC) has the following features:

•

Supports up to 64 interrupt channels (16 external channels)

Interrupt mask for each channel

Each interrupt channel can be mapped to a Fast Interrupt Request (FIQ) or to an Interrupt Request

(IRQ) type of interrupt.

•

Hardware prioritization of simultaneous interrupts

Configurable interrupt priority (2 levels of FIQ and 6 levels of IRQ)

Configurable interrupt entry table (FIQ and IRQ priority table entry) to reduce interrupt processing time

The ARM core supports two interrupt types: FIQ and IRQ. See the ARM926EJ-S Technical Reference

Manual for detailed information about the ARM’s FIQ and IRQ interrupts. Each interrupt channel is

mappable to an FIQ or to an IRQ type of interrupt, and each channel can be enabled or disabled. The

INTC supports user-configurable interrupt-priority and interrupt entry addresses. Entry addresses minimize

the time spent jumping to interrupt service routines (ISRs). When an interrupt occurs, the corresponding

highest priority ISR’s address is stored in the INTC’s ENTRY register. The IRQ or FIQ interrupt routine can

read the ENTRY register and jump to the corresponding ISR directly. Thus, the ARM does not require a

software dispatcher to determine the asserted interrupt.

3.4.1 Interrupt Mapping

The AINTC takes up to 64 ARM device interrupts and maps them to either the IRQ or to the FIQ of the

ARM. Each interrupt is also assigned one of 8 priority levels (2 for FIQ, 6 for IRQ). For interrupts with the

same priority level, the priority is determined by the hardware interrupt number (the lowest number has the

highest priority). Table 3-1 shows the connection of device interrupts to the ARM.

Table 3-1. AINTC Interrupt Connections⁽¹⁾

Interrupt

Number

Acronym

Source

Interrupt

Number

Acronym

Source

VPSSINT0

VPSS - INT0,

Configurable via

VPSSBL register:

INTSEL

TINT0

Timer 0 - TINT12

VPSSINT1

VPSSINT2

VPSSINT3

VPSSINT4

VPSS - INT1

VPSS - INT2

VPSS - INT3

VPSS - INT4

TINT1

Timer 0 - TINT34

Timer 1 - TINT12

Timer 1 - TINT34

PWM0

TINT2

TINT3

PWMINT0

(1) The total number of interrupts in DM355 exceeds 64, which is the maximum value of the AINTC module. Therefore, several interrupts

are multiplexed and you must use the register ARM_INTMUX in the System Control Module to select the interrupt source for multiplexed

interrupts. Refer to the ARM Subsystem Guide for more information on the System Control Module register ARM_INTMUX.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 3-1. AINTC Interrupt Connections (continued)

Interrupt

Number

Acronym

Source

Interrupt

Number

Acronym

Source

VPSSINT5

VPSSINT6

VPSSINT7

VPSSINT8

Reserved

USBINT

VPSS - INT5

VPSS - INT6

VPSS - INT7

VPSS - INT8

PWMINT1

PWMINT2

I2CINT

PWM 1

PWM2

I2C

UARTINT0

UARTINT1

SPINT0-0

SPINT0-1

GPIO0

UART0

UART1

SPI0

USB OTG Collector

GPIO

RTOINT or

TINT4

RTO or

Timer 2 - TINT12

SYS.ARM_INTMUX

GPIO1

UARTINT2 or

TINT5

UART2 or

Timer 2 - TINT34

GPIO2

GPIO

TINT6

Timer 3 TINT12

GPIO3

GPIO4

GPIO5

GPIO

CCINT0

EDMA CC Region 0

SPINT1-0 or

CCERRINT

SPI1 or

EDMA CC Error

SPINT1-1 or

TCERRINT0

SPI1 or

EDMA TC0 Error

GPIO6

GPIO7

GPIO

SPINT2-0 or

TCERRINT1

SPI2 or

EDMA TC1 Error

PSCINT

SPINT2-1

TINT7

PSC - ALLINT

SPI2

GPIO8

GPIO

GPIO9

Timer3 - TINT34

MMC/SD0

GPIOBNK0

GPIOBNK1

GPIOBNK2

SDIOINT0

MBXINT0 or

MBXINT1

ASP0 or

ASP1

MBRINT0 or

MBRINT1

ASP0 or

ASP1

GPIOBNK3

GPIO

MMCINT0

MMCINT1

PWMINT3

DDRINT

MMC/SD0

MMC/SC1

PWM3

GPIOBNK4

GPIOBNK5

GPIOBNK6

COMMTX

COMMRX

EMUINT

GPIO

DDR EMIF

Async EMIF

SDIO1

ARMSS

E2ICE

AEMIFINT

SDIOINT1

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

3.5 Device Clocking

3.5.1 Overview

The DM355 requires one primary reference clock . The reference clock frequency may be generated

either by crystal input or by external oscillator. The reference clock is the clock at the pins named

MXI1/MXOI. The reference clock drives two separate PLL controllers (PLLC1 and PLLC2). PLLC1

generates the clocks required by the ARM, MPEG and JPEG co-processor, VPBE, VPSS, and

peripherals. PLL2 generates the clock required by the DDR PHY. A block diagram of DM355's clocking

architecture is shown in Figure 5-1. The PLLs are described further in Section 3.6.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

SYSCLKBP

AUXCLK

CLKOUT2

UART0, 1

I2C

BPDIV (/3)

Reference clock

(MXI/MXO)

24 MHz or 36 Mhz

AUXCLK (/1)

PLLDIV1 (/2)

SYSCLK1

ARM subsystem

MPEG/JPEG

Coprocessor

PWMs (x4)

Timers (x4)

RTO

CLKOUT1

Reference

clock

(MXI/MXO)

(24 MHz or

36 MHz)

SYSCLK2

PLLDIV2 (/4)

USB Phy

SYSCLK3

SYSCLK4

60 MHz

PLLDIV3 (/n)

USB

EMIF/NAND

MMC/SD (x2)

SPI (x3)

PLLDIV4 (/4 or /2)

VPSS

PLL controller 1

VPFE

VPBE

PCLK

ASP (x2)

GPIO

EXTCLK

ARM INTC

DAC

UART2

EDMA

SYSCLK1

PLLDIV1 (/1)

DDR PHY

DDR

Bus logic

Sys logic

PSC

SYSCLKBP

BPDIV (/8)

CLKOUT3

PLL controller 2

IcePick

Sequencer

Figure 3-2. Device Clocking Block Diagram

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

3.5.2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-216

This section describes the only supported device clocking configurations for DM355-216. The DM355

supports either 24 MHz (typical) or 36 MHz reference clock (crystal or external oscillator input).

Configurations are shown for both cases.

3.5.2.1 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-216 (24 MHz reference)

3.5.2.1.1 DM355-216 PLL1 (24 MHz reference)

All supported clocking configurations for DM355-216 PLL1 with 24 MHz reference clock are shown in

Table 3-2

Table 3-2. PLL1 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-216 (24 MHz reference)

PREDI

PLLM

POSTDIV

PLL1

VCO

ARM /

MPEG and

JPEG

Peripherals

Venc

VPSS

Co-Processor

(/8

(/2 or /1

(MHz) PLLDIV SYSC PLLDIV SYSCLK2

PLLDIV3

(/n

SYSCL

PLLDIV4

(/4 or /2

SYSCLK

fixed) programmable programma

LK1

(MHz)

)

ble)

(/2

(MHz)

(/4

programma (MHz) programmable

(MHz)

fixed)

ble)

)

bypass

bypas

2.4

144

135

126

117

108

432

405

378

351

324

297

270

243

216

189

162

216

202.5

189

108

101.25

94.5

87.75

108

101.25

94.5

87.75

175.5

162

148.5

135

74.25

67.5

60.75

74.25

135

180

162

144

126

108

121.5

108

121.5

108

94.5

47.25

40.5

94.5

3.5.2.1.2 DM355-216 PLL2 (24 MHz reference)

All supported clocking configurations for DM355-216 PLL2 with 24 MHz reference clock are shown in

Table 3-3

Table 3-3. PLL2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-216 (24 MHz reference)

PREDIV

PLLM

POSTDIV

PLL2 VCO

DDR PHY

DDR Clock

(/n programmable)

(/1 fixed)

(MHz)

PLLDIV1

(/1 fixed)

SYSCLK1

(MHz)

DDR_CLK

(MHz)

programmable)

bypass

114

108

102

bypass

342

324

306

288

266

200

160

171

162

153

144

133

100

324

306

288

133

100

266

200

160

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

3.5.2.2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-216 (36 MHz reference)

3.5.2.2.1 DM355-216 PLL1 (36 MHz reference)

All supported clocking configurations for DM355-216 PLL1 with 36 MHz reference clock are shown in

Table 3-4

Table 3-4. PLL1 Supported Clocking Configurations DM355-216 (36 MHz reference)

PREDI

PLLM

POSTDIV

PLL1

VCO

ARM /

MPEG and

JPEG

Peripherals

Venc

VPSS

Co-Processor

(/8

(/2 or /1

(MHz) PLLDIV SYSCL PLLDIV SYSCLK

PLLDIV3

SYSCLK

(MHz)

PLLDIV4

(/4 or /2

programmable

)

SYSCLK

(MHz)

fixed) programmable programma

(/n

programma

ble)

)

ble)

(/2

(MHz)

(/4

(MHz)

fixed)

bypass

432

405

378

351

324

297

270

243

216

3.6

216

108

180

168

156

144

132

120

108

202.5

189

101.25

94.5

87.75

101.25

94.5

87.75

175.5

162

148.5

135

74.25

67.5

60.75

74.25

135

121.5

108

121.5

108

3.5.2.2.2 DM355-216 PLL2 (36 MHz reference)

All supported clocking configurations for DM355-216 PLL2 with 36 MHz reference clock are shown in

Table 3-5

Table 3-5. PLL2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-216 (36 MHz reference)

PREDIV

PLLM

POSTDIV

PLL2 VCO

DDR PHY

DDR Clock

(/n programmable)

(/1 fixed)

(MHz)

PLLDIV1

(/1 fixed)

SYSCLK1

(MHz)

DDR_CLK

(MHz)

programmable)

bypass

114

108

102

bypass

342

324

306

288

266

200

160

171

162

153

144

133

100

324

306

288

133

150

120

266

200

160

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

3.5.3 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270

This section describes the only supported device clocking configurations for DM355-270. The DM355

supports either 24 MHz (typical) or 36 MHz reference clock (crystal or external oscillator input).

Configurations are shown for both cases.

3.5.3.1 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270 (24 MHz reference)

3.5.3.1.1 DM355-270 PLL1 (24 MHz reference)

All supported clocking configurations for DM355-270 PLL1 with 24 MHz reference clock are shown in

Table 3-2

Table 3-6. PLL1 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270 (24 MHz reference)

PRED

PLLM

POSTDIV PLL1

ARM /

Peripherals

Venc

VPSS

VCO MPEG and JPEG

Co-Processor

(/8

(/2 fixed) (MHz) PLLDIV1 SYSC PLLDI SYSCLK2

PLLDIV3

SYSCLK PLLDIV4 SYSCLK4

fixed) programmable)

(/2 fixed)

LK1

(MHz)

(/4

(MHz)

(/n

(/2 fixed)

(MHz)

programmable)

(MHz)

fixed)

bypas

bypass

bypas

2.4

180

171

162

153

144

135

126

117

108

540

513

486

459

432

405

378

351

324

297

270

243

216

189

162

270

256.5

243

135

128.25

121.5

114.75

108

135

128.25

121.5

114.75

108

229.5

216

202.5

189

101.25

94.5

101.25

94.5

175.5

162

87.75

148.5

135

74.25

67.5

74.25

135

180

162

144

126

108

121.5

108

60.75

121.5

108

94.5

47.25

40.5

94.5

3.5.3.1.2 DM355-270 PLL2 (24 MHz reference)

All supported clocking configurations for DM355-270 PLL2 with 24 MHz reference clock are shown in

Table 3-3

Table 3-7. PLL2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270 (24 MHz reference)

PREDIV

PLLM

POSTDIV

PLL2 VCO

DDR PHY

DDR Clock

(/n programmable)

(/1 fixed)

(MHz)

PLLDIV1

(/1 fixed)

SYSCLK1

(MHz)

DDR_CLK

(MHz)

programmable)

bypass

144

bypass

432

414

396

378

360

342

216

207

198

189

180

171

138

414

132

396

126

378

120

360

114

342

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 3-7. PLL2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270 (24 MHz reference) (continued)

PREDIV

PLLM

108

102

POSTDIV

PLL2 VCO

324

DDR PHY

DDR Clock

162

324

306

288

266

200

160

306

153

288

144

133

100

266

133

200

100

160

3.5.3.2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270 (36 MHz reference)

3.5.3.2.1 DM355-270 PLL1 (36 MHz reference)

All supported clocking configurations for DM355-270 PLL1 with 36 MHz reference clock are shown in

Table 3-4

Table 3-8. PLL1 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270 (36 MHz reference)

PREDI

PLLM

POSTDI PLL1

VCO

ARM /

MPEG and

JPEG

Peripherals

Venc

VPSS

Co-Processor

(/8

(/2 fixed) (MHz) PLLDIV SYSC PLLDIV SYSCLK2

PLLDIV3

SYSCL PLLDIV4 SYSCLK4

fixed) programmable)

LK1

(MHz)

(/n

(/2 fixed)

(MHz)

(/2

(MHz)

(/4

programmable)

(MHz)

fixed)

bypas

bypass

bypas

3.6

120

114

108

102

540

513

486

459

432

405

378

351

324

297

270

243

216

270

256.5

243

135

128.25

121.5

114.75

108

135

128.25

121.5

114.75

108

229.5

216

180

168

156

144

132

120

108

202.5

189

101.25

94.5

202.5

189

175.5

162

87.75

175.5

162

148.5

135

74.25

67.5

148.5

135

121.5

108

60.75

121.5

108

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

3.5.3.2.2 DM355-270 PLL2 (36 MHz reference)

All supported clocking configurations for DM355-270 PLL2 with 36 MHz reference clock are shown in

Table 3-5

Table 3-9. PLL2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270 (36 MHz reference)

PREDIV

PLLM

POSTDIV

PLL2 VCO

DDR PHY

DDR Clock

(/n programmable)

(/1 fixed)

(MHz)

PLLDIV1

(/1 fixed)

SYSCLK1

(MHz)

DDR_CLK

(MHz)

programmable)

bypass

144

138

132

126

120

114

108

102

bypass

432

414

396

378

360

342

324

306

288

266

200

160

432

414

396

378

360

342

324

306

288

266

200

160

216

207

198

189

180

171

162

153

144

133

100

133

150

120

3.5.4 Peripheral Clocking Considerations

3.5.4.1 Video Processing Back End Clocking

The Video Processing Back End (VPBE) is a sub-module of the VPSS (Video Processing Subsystem).

The VPBE is designed to interface with a variety of LCDs and an internal DAC module. There are two

asynchronous clock domains in the VPBE: an internal clock domain and an external clock domain. The

internal clock domain is driven by the VPSS clock (PLL1 SYSCLK4). The external clock domain is

configurable; you can select one of five source:

•

24 MHz crystal input at MXI1

27 MHz crystal input at MXI2 (optional feature, not typically used)

PLL1 SYSCLK3

EXTCLK pin (external VPBE clock input pin)

PCLK pin (VPFE pixel clock input pin)

See the TMS320DM355 DMSoC Video Processing Back End (VPBE) User's Guide for complete

information on VPBE clocking.

3.5.4.2 USB Clocking

The USB Controller is driven by two clocks: an output clock of PLL1 (SYSCLK2) and an output clock of

the USB PHY.

NOTE

For proper USB function, SYSCLK2 must be greater than 60 MHz.

The USB PHY takes an input clock that is configurable by the USB PHY clock source bits (PHYCLKSRC)

in the USB PHY control register (USB_PHY_CTL) in the System Control Module. When a 24 MHz crystal

is used at MXI1/MXO1, set PHYCLKSRC to 0. This will present a 24 MHz clock to the USB PHY. When a

36 MHz crystal is used at MXI1/MXO1, set PHYCLKSRC to 1. This will present a 12 MHz clock (36 MHz

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

divided internally by three) to the USB PHY. The USB PHY is capable of accepting only 24 MHz and 12

MHz; thus you must use either a 24 MHz or 36 MHz crystal at MXI1/MXO1. See the TMS320DM355

DMSoC Univeral Serial Bus (USB) Controller User's Guide (SPRUED2) for more information. See the

TMS320DM355 DMSoC ARM Subsystem User's Guide for more information on the System Control

Module.

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

3.6 PLL Controller (PLLC)

This section describes the PLL Controllers for PLL1 and PLL2. See the TMS320DM355 Digital Media

System-on-Chip ARM Subsystem User's Guide for more information on the PLL controllers.

3.6.1 PLL Controller Module

The DM355 has two PLL controllers that provide clocks to different components of the chip. PLL controller

1 (PLLC1) provides clocks to most of the components of the chip. PLL controller 2 (PLLC2) provides

clocks to the DDR PHY.

As a module, the PLL controller provides the following:

•

Glitch-free transitions (on changing PLL settings)

Domain clocks alignment

Clock gating

PLL bypass

PLL power down

The various clock outputs given by the PLL controller are as follows:

•

Domain clocks: SYSCLKn

Bypass domain clock: SYSCLKBP

Auxiliary clock from reference clock: AUXCLK

Various dividers that can be used are as follows:

•

Pre-PLL divider: PREDIV

Post-PLL divider: POSTDIV

SYSCLK divider: PLLDIV1, … , PLLDIVn

SYSCLKBP divider: BPDIV

Multipliers supported are as follows:

PLL multiplier control: PLLM

•

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

3.6.2 PLLC1

PLLC1 provides most of the DM355 clocks. Software controls PLLC1 operation through the PLLC1

registers. The following list, Table 3-10, and Figure 3-3 describe the customizations of PLLC1 in the

DM355.

•

Provides primary DM355 system clock

Software configurable

Accepts clock input or internal oscillator input

PLL pre-divider value is fixed to (/8)

PLL multiplier value is programmable

PLL post-divider

Only SYSCLK[4:1] are used

SYSCLK1 divider value is fixed to (/2)

SYSCLK2 divider value is fixed to (/4)

SYSCLK3 divider value is programmable

SYSCLK4 divider value is programmable to (/4) or (/2)

SYSCLKBP divider value is fixed to (/3)

SYSCLK1 is routed to the ARM Subsystem

SYSCLK2 is routed to peripherals

SYSCLK3 is routed to the VPBE module

SYSCLK4 is routed to the VPSS module

AUXCLK is routed to peripherals with fixed clock domain and also to the output pin CLKOUT1

SYSCLKBP is routed to the output pin CLKOUT2

Table 3-10. PLLC1 Output Clocks

Output Clock

Used By

PLLDIV

Divider

Notes

SYSCLK1

SYSCLK2

SYSCLK3

ARM Subsystem / MPEG and JPEG Co-Processor

Peripherals

Fixed divider

VPBE (VENC module)

Programmable divider (used to get 27

MHz for VENC)

SYSCLK4

AUXCLK

VPSS

/4 or /2

none

Programmable divider

No divider

Peripherals, CLKOUT1

CLKOUT2

SYSCLKBP

Fixed divider

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

CLKMODE

PLLEN

CLKIN

OSCIN

Post-DIV

(/2 or /1)

Pre-DIV

(/8)

SYSCLK1

(ARM and MPEG/JPEG

PLL

PLLDIV1 (/2)

Coprocessor)

SYSCLK2

(peripherals)

PLLM

(programmable)

PLLDIV2 (/4)

SYSCLK3

(VPBE)

PLLDIV3 (/3)

SYSCLK4

(VPSS)

PLLDIV4

(/4 or /2)

AUXCLK

(Peripherals,

CLKOUT1)

SYSCLKBP

(CLKOUT2)

BPDIV (/3)

Figure 3-3. PLLC1 Configuration In DM355

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

3.6.3 PLLC2

PLLC2 provides the DDR PHY clock and CLKOUT3. Software controls PLLC2 operation through the

PLLC2 registers. The following list, Table 3-11, and Figure 3-4 describe the customizations of PLLC2 in

the DM355.

•

Provides DDR PHY clock and CLKOUT3

Software configurable

Accepts clock input or internal oscillator input (same input as PLLC1)

PLL pre-divider value is programmable

PLL multiplier value is programmable

PLL post-divider value is fixed to (/1)

Only SYSCLK[1] is used

SYSCLK1 divider value is fixed to (/1)

SYSCLKBP divider value is fixed to (/8)

SYSCLK1 is routed to the DDR PHY

SYSCLKBP is routed to the output pin CLKOUT3

AUXCLK is not used.

Table 3-11. PLLC2 Output Clocks

Output Clock

SYSCLK1

Used by

DDR PHY

CLKOUT3

PLLDIV Divider

Notes

Fixed divider

SYSCLKBP

PLLC2 Configuration in DM355

CLKMODE

PLLEN

CLKIN

OSCIN

Post-DIV

(/1)

Pre-DIV

(programmable)

PLL

SYSCLK1

PLLDIV1 (/1)

(DDR PHY)

PLLM

(programmable)

SYSCLKBP

(CLKOUT3)

BPDIV (/8)

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

3.7 Power and Sleep Controller (PSC)

In the DM355 system, the Power and Sleep Controller (PSC) is responsible for managing transitions of

system power on/off, clock on/off, and reset. A block diagram of the PSC is shown in Figure 3-5. Many of

the operations of the PSC are transparent to software, such as power-on-reset operations. However, the

PSC provides you with an interface to control several important clock and reset operations.

The PSC includes the following features:

•

Manages chip power-on/off, clock on/off, and resets

Provides a software interface to:

–

Control module clock ON/OFF

Control module resets

•

Supports IcePick emulation features: power, clock, and reset

For more information on the PSC, see the ARM Subsystem User's Guide.

DMSoC

ARM

PLLC

clks

arm_clock

arm_mreset

PSC

arm_power

Interrupt

AINTC

Emulation

RESETN

VDD

MODx

module_clock

module_mreset

module_power

Always on

domain

Figure 3-5. DM355 Power and Sleep Controller (PSC)

3.8 System Control Module

The DM355’s system control module is a system-level module containing status and top-level control logic

required by the device. The system control module consists of a miscellaneous set of status and control

registers, accessible by the ARM and supporting all of the following system features and operations:

•

Device identification

Device configuration

–

Pin multiplexing control

Device boot configuration status

•

ARM interrupt and EDMA event multiplexing control

Special peripheral status and control

–

Timer64+

USB PHY control

VPSS clock and video DAC control and status

DDR VTP control

Clockout circuitry

GIO de-bounce control

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

•

Power management

Deep sleep and fast NAND boot control

Bandwidth Management

Bus master DMA priority control

For more information on the System Control Module refer to the ARM Subsystem User's Guide.

–

3.9 Pin Multiplexing

The DM355 makes extensive use of pin multiplexing to accommodate the large number of peripheral

functions in the smallest possible package. In order to accomplish this, pin multiplexing is controlled using

a combination of hardware configuration (at device reset) and software control. No attempt is made by the

DM355 hardware to ensure that the proper pin muxing has been selected for the peripherals or interface

mode being used, thus proper pin muxing configuration is the responsibility of the board and software

designers. An overview of the pin multiplexing is shown in Table 3-12.

Table 3-12. Peripheral Pin Mux Overview

Peripheral

VPFE (video in)

VPBE (video out)

AEMIF

Muxed With

GPIO and SPI2

GPIO, PWM, and RTO

GPIO

Primary Function

VPFE (video in)

VPBE (video out)

AEMIF

Secondary Function

Tertiary Function

GPIO

SPI2

PWM and RTO

GPIO

none

ASP0

GPIO

ASP0

GPIO

none

MMC/SD1

CLKOUT

I2C

GPIO and UART2

GPIO

MMC/SD1

CLKOUT

I2C

GPIO

UART2

none

GPIO

none

UART1

GPIO

UART1

GPIO

none

SPI1

GPIO

SPI1

GPIO

none

SPI0

GPIO

SPI0

GPIO

none

3.9.1 Hardware Controlled Pin Multiplexing

Use the Asynchronous EMIF configuration pins (AECFG[3:0]) for hardware pin mux control. AECFG[3:0]

control the partitioning of the AEMIF addresses and GPIOs at reset, which allows you to properly

configure the number of AEMIF address pins required by the boot device while unused addresses pins are

available as GPIOs. These settings may be changed by software after reset by programming the PinMux2

address bits enabled on the AEMIF is selectable from 0 to 16. Pins that are not assigned to another

peripheral and not enabled as address signals become GPIOs (except EM_A[2:1]). The enabled address

signals are always contiguous from EM_BA[1] upwards; bits cannot be skipped. The exception to this are

EM_A[2:1]. These signals (can be used to) represent the ALE and CLE signals for the NAND Flash mode

of the AEMIF and are always enabled. Note that EM_A[0] does not represent the lowest AEMIF address

bit. DM355 supports only 16-bit and 8-bit data widths for the AEMIF. In 16-bit mode, EM_BA[1] represents

the LS address bit (the half-word address) and EM_BA[0] represents the MS address bit (A[14]). In 8-bit

mode, EM_BA[1:0] represent the 2 LS address bits. Note that additional selections are available by

programming the PinMux2 register in software after boot. Note that AECFG selection of ‘0010’ selects

OneNAND interface. The AEMIF needs to operate in the half-rate mode (full_rate = 0) to meet frequency

requirements. Software should not change the PINMUX2 register setting to affect the AEMIF rate

operation. A soft reset of the AEMIF should be performed any time a rate change is made.

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 3-13. AECFG (Async EMIF Configuration) Pin Mux Coding

1101(NAND)

GPIO[54]

GPIO[55]

GPIO[56]

EM_A[1]

EM_A[2]

GPIO[57]

GPIO[58]

GPIO[59]

GPIO[60]

GPIO[61]

GPIO[62]

GPIO[63]

GPIO[64]

GPIO[65]

GPIO[66]

GPIO[67]

GPIO[46]

GPIO[47]

GPIO[48]

GPIO[49]

GPIO[50]

GPIO[51]

GPIO[52]

GPIO[53]

1100

1010 (OneNAND)

EM_A[14]

EM_BA[1]

EM_A[0]

1000 (8-bit SRAM)

EM_BA[0]

EM_BA[1]

EM_A[0]

0010 (16-bit SRAM)

EM_A[14]

EM_BA[1]

EM_A[0]

0000

GPIO[54]

EM_BA[1]

EM_A[0]

EM_A[1]

EM_A[2]

EM_A[3]

EM_A[4]

EM_A[5]

EM_A[6]

EM_A[7]

EM_A[8]

EM_A[9]

EM_A[10]

EM_A[11]

EM_A[12]

EM_A[13]

GPIO[46]

GPIO[47]

GPIO[48]

GPIO[49]

GPIO[50]

GPIO[51]

GPIO[52]

GPIO[53]

EM_BA[0]

EM_BA[1]

EM_A[0]

EM_A[1]

EM_A[2]

EM_A[3]

EM_A[4]

EM_A[5]

EM_A[6]

EM_A[7]

EM_A[8]

EM_A[9]

EM_A[10]

EM_A[11]

EM_A[12]

EM_A[13]

EM_D[8]

EM_D[9]

EM_D[10]

EM_D[11]

EM_D[12]

EM_D[13]

EM_D[14]

EM_D[15]

EM_A[1]

EM_A[2]

EM_A[3]

EM_A[4]

EM_A[5]

EM_A[6]

EM_A[7]

EM_A[8]

EM_A[9]

EM_A[10]

EM_A[11]

EM_A[12]

EM_A[13]

GPIO[46]

GPIO[47]

GPIO[48]

GPIO[49]

GPIO[50]

GPIO[51]

GPIO[52]

GPIO[53]

EM_A[10]

EM_A[11]

EM_A[12]

EM_A[13]

GPIO[46]

GPIO[47]

GPIO[48]

GPIO[49]

GPIO[50]

GPIO[51]

GPIO[52]

GPIO[53]

EM_A[10]

EM_A[11]

EM_A[12]

EM_A[13]

EM_D[8]

EM_D[9]

EM_D[10]

EM_D[11]

EM_D[12]

EM_D[13]

EM_D[14]

EM_D[15]

3.9.2 Software Controlled Pin Multiplexing

All pin multiplexing options are configurable by software via pin mux registers that reside in the System

Control Module. The PinMux0 Register controls the Video In muxing, PinMux1 register controls Video Out

signals, PinMux2 register controls AEMIF signals, PinMux3 registers control the multiplexing of the GIO

signals, the PinMux4 register controls the SPI and MMC/SD0 signals. Refer to the ARM Subsystem User's

Guide for complete descriptions of the pin mux registers.

3.10 Device Reset

There are five types of reset in DM355. The types of reset differ by how they are initiated and/or by their

effect on the chip. Each type is briefly described in Table 3-14 and further described in the ARM

Subsystem Guide.

Table 3-14. Reset Types

Type

Initiator

Effect

POR (Power-On-Reset)

RESET pin low and TRST low

Total reset of the chip (cold reset). Resets all modules

including memory and emulation.

Warm Reset

RESET pin low and TRST high (initiated by ARM

emulator).

Resets all modules including memory, except ARM

emulation.

Max Reset

ARM emulator or Watchdog Timer (WDT).

ARM emulator

Same effect as warm reset.

System Reset

Resets all modules except memory and ARM

emulation. It is a soft reset that maintains memory

contents and does not affect or reset clocks or power

states.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 3-14. Reset Types (continued)

Type

Initiator

Effect

Module Reset

ARM software

Resets a specific module. Allows the ARM to

independently reset any module. Module reset is

intended as a debug tool not as a tool to use in

production.

3.11 Default Device Configurations

After POR, warm reset, and max reset, the chip is in its default configuration. This section highlights the

default configurations associated with PLLs, clocks, ARM boot mode, and AEMIF.

NOTE

Default configuration is the configuration immediately after POR, warm reset, and max

reset and just before the boot process begins. The boot ROM updates the configuration.

See Section 3.12 for more information on the boot process.

3.11.1 Device Configuration Pins

The device configuration pins are described in Table 3-15. The device configuration pins are latched at

reset and allow you to configure all of the following options at reset:

•

ARM Boot Mode

Asynchronous EMIF pin configuration

These pins are described further in the following sections.

NOTE

The device configuration pins are multiplexed with AEMIF pins. After the device

configuration pins are sampled at reset, they automatically change to function as AEMIF

pins. Pin multiplexing is described in Section 3.8.

Table 3-15. Device Configuration

Default Setting (by

internal

Device

Configuration Input

Sampled

pull-up/

pull-down)

Function

Device Configuration Affected

BTSEL[1:0]

Selects ARM boot mode

00 = Boot from ROM (NAND)

01 = Boot from AEMIF

10 = Boot from ROM

(MMC/SD)

EM_A[13:12]

(NAND)

If any ROM boot mode is selected, GIO61

is used to indicated boot status.

If NAND boot is selected, CE0 is used for

NAND. Use AECFG[3:0] to configure

AEMIF pins for NAND.

11 = Boot from ROM (UART)

If AEMIF boot is selected, CE0 is used for

AEMIF device (OneNAND, ROM). Use

AECFG[3:0] to configure AEMIF pins for

NAND.

If MMC/SD boot is selected, MMC/SD0 is

used.

AECFG[3:0]

Selects AEMIF pin

configuration

EM_A[11:8]

1101

(NAND)

Selects the AEMIF pin configuration. Refer

to pin-muxing information in Section 3.9.1.

Note that AECFG[3:0] affects both AEMIF

(BTSEL[1:0]=01) and NAND

(BTSEL[1:0]=00) boot modes.

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

3.11.2 PLL Configuration

After POR, warm reset, and max reset, the PLLs and clocks are set to their default configurations. The

PLLs are in bypass mode and disabled by default. This means that the input reference clock at MXI1

(typically 24 MHz) drives the chip after reset. For more information on device clocking, see Section 3.5

and Section 3.6. The default state of the PLLs is reflected in the default state of the register bits in the

PLLC registers. Refer the the ARM Subsystem User's Guide for PLLC register descriptions.

3.11.3 Power Domain and Module State Configuration

Only a subset of modules are enabled after reset by default. Table 3-16 shows which modules are

enabled after reset. Table 3-16 as shows that the following modules are enabled depending on the

sampled state of the device configuration pins: EDMA (CC and TC0), AEMIF, MMC/SD0, UART0, and

Timer0. For example, UART0 is enabled after reset when the device configuration pins (BTSEL[1:0] = 11 -

Enable UART) select UART boot mode. For more information on module configuration refer to the ARM

Subsystem User's Guide.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 3-16. Module Configuration

Default States

Module

Number

Module Name

Power Domain

Power Domain State

Module State

VPSS Master

VPSS Slave

EDMA (CC)

AlwaysOn

SyncRst

BTSEL[1:0] = 00 – Enable (NAND)

BTSEL[1:0] = 01 – Enable (OneNAND)

BTSEL[1:0] = 10 – SyncRst (MMC/SD)

BTSEL[1:0] = 11 – Enable (UART)

SyncRst

EDMA (TC0)

AlwaysOn

EDMA (TC1)

Timer3

SPI1

AlwaysOn

SyncRst

MMC/SD1

ASP1

SyncRst

USB

SyncRst

PWM3

SPI2

SyncRst

RTO

SyncRst

DDR EMIF

AEMIF

SyncRst

BTSEL[1:0] = 00 – Enable (NAND)

BTSEL[1:0] = 01 – Enable (OneNAND)

BTSEL[1:0] = 10 – SyncRst (MMC/SD)

BTSEL[1:0] = 11 – Enable (UART)

BTSEL[1:0] = 00 – Enable (NAND)

BTSEL[1:0] = 01 – Enable (OneNAND)

BTSEL[1:0] = 10 – SyncRst (MMC/SD)

BTSEL[1:0] = 11 – Enable (UART)

MMC/SD0

AlwaysOn

Reserved

ASP

AlwaysOn

SyncRst

I2C

SyncRst

UART0

BTSEL[1:0] = 00 – Enable (NAND)

BTSEL[1:0] = 01 – Enable (OneNAND)

BTSEL[1:0] = 10 – SyncRst (MMC/SD)

BTSEL[1:0] = 11 – Enable (UART)

UART1

UART2

SPI0

AlwaysOn

SyncRst

PWM0

PWM1

PWM2

GPIO

SyncRst

TIMER0

BTSEL[1:0] = 00 – Enable (NAND)

BTSEL[1:0] = 01 – Enable (OneNAND)

BTSEL[1:0] = 10 – SyncRst (MMC/SD)

BTSEL[1:0] = 11 – Enable (UART)

SyncRst

TIMER1

TIMER2

AlwaysOn

Enable

System Module

Enable

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 3-16. Module Configuration (continued)

Default States

ARM

BUS

AlwaysOn

Reserved

Always On

Enable

Reserved

SyncRst

BUS

Reserved

VPSS DAC

Reserved

3.11.4 ARM Boot Mode Configuration

The input pins BTSEL[1:0] determine whether the ARM will boot from its ROM or from the Asynchronous

EMIF (AEMIF). When ROM boot is selected (BTSEL[1:0] = 00, 10, or 11), a jump to the start of internal

ROM (address 0x0000: 8000) is forced into the first fetched instruction word. The embedded ROM boot

loader code (RBL) then performs certain configuration steps, reads the BOOTCFG register to determine

the desired boot method, and branches to the appropriate boot routine (i.e., a NAND, MMC/SD, or UART

loader routine).

If AEMIF boot is selected (BTSEL[1:0] = 01), a jump to the start of AEMIF (address 0x0200: 0000) is

forced into the first fetched instruction word. The ARM then continues executing from external

asynchronous memory using the default AEMIF timings until modified by software.

NOTE

For AEMIF boot, the OneNAND must be connected to the first AEMIF chip select space

(EM_CE0). Also, the AEMIF does not support direct execution from NAND Flash.

Boot modes are further described in Section 3.12.

3.11.5 AEMIF Configuration

3.11.5.1 AEMIF Pin Configuration

The input pins AECFG[3:0] determine the AEMIF configuration immediately after reset. Use AECFG[3:0]

to properly configure the pins of the AEMIF. Refer to the section on pin multiplexing in Section 3.9.

Also, see the Asynchronous External Memory Interface (AEMIF) Peripheral Reference Guide (SPRUEE8)

for more information on the AEMIF.

3.11.5.2 AEMIF Timing Configuration

When AEMIF is enabled, the wait state registers are reset to the slowest possible configuration, which is

88 cycles per access (16 cycles of setup, 64 cycles of strobe, and 8 cycles of hold). Thus, with a 24 MHz

clock at MXI, the AEMIF is configured to run at 6 MHz/88 which equals approximately 68 kHz by default.

See the Asynchronous External Memory Interface (AEMIF) Peripheral Reference Guide for more

information on the AEMIF.

3.12 Device Boot Modes

The DM355 ARM can boot from either Async EMIF (AEMIF/OneNand) or from ARM ROM, as determined

by the setting of the device configuration pins BTSEL[1:0]. The BTSEL[1:0] pins can define the ROM boot

mode further as well.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

The boot selection pins (BTSEL[1:0]) determine the ARM boot process. After reset (POR, warm reset, or

max reset), ARM program execution begins in ARM ROM at 0x0000: 8000, except when BTSEL[1:0] = 01,

indicating AEMIF (AEMIF/OneNand) boot. See Section 3.11.1 for information on the boot selection pins.

3.12.1 Boot Modes Overview

DM355’s ARM ROM boot loader (RBL) executes when the BOOTSEL[1:0] pins indicate a condition other

than the normal ARM EMIF boot.

•

If BTSEL[1:0] = 01 - Asynchronous EMIF (AEMIF) boot. This mode is handled by hardware control and

does not involve the ROM. In the case of OneNAND, the user is responsible for putting any necessary

boot code in the OneNAND's boot page. This code shall configure the AEMIF module for the

OneNAND device. After the AEMIF module is configured, booting will continue immediately after the

OneNAND’s boot page with the AEMIF module managing pages thereafter. Furthermore, in case of

Fast Boot from AEMIF/OneNAND, the user is responsible for checking the state of the FASTBOOT bit

in the BOOTCFG register in the System Module in order to respond properly by executing any required

device init, bringing mDDR out of self-refresh, and branching to user entry point in mDDR.

•

The RBL supports 3 distinct boot modes:

–

BTSEL[1:0] = 00 - ARM NAND Boot

BTSEL[1:0] = 10 - ARM MMC/SD Boot

BTSEL[1:0] = 11 - ARM UART Boot

•

If NAND boot fails, then MMC/SD mode is tried.

If MMC/SD boot fails, then MMC/SD boot is tried again.

If UART boot fails, then UART boot is tried again.

RBL uses GIO61 to indicate boot status (can use to blink LED):

–

After reset, GIO61 is initially driven low (e.g LED off)

If NAND boot fails and then MMC/SD boot fails, then GIO61 shall toggle at 4Hz while MMC/SD

boot is retried.

–

If MMC/SD boot fails, then GIO61 shall toggle at 4Hz while MMC/SD boot is retried

If UART boot fails, then GIO61 shall toggle at 2Hz while UART boot is retried

When boot is successful, just before program control is given to UBL, GIO61 is driven high (e.g.

LED on)

–

DM355 Timer0 shall be used to accurately toggle GIO61 at 4Hz and 2Hz

•

ARM ROM Boot - NAND Mode

–

No support for a full firmware boot. Instead, copies a second stage user boot loader (UBL) from

NAND flash to ARM internal RAM (AIM) and transfers control to the user-defined UBL.

–

Support for NAND with page sizes up to 2048 bytes.

Support for magic number error detection and retry (up to 24 times) when loading UBL

Support for up to 30KB UBL (32KB IRAM - ~2KB for RBL stack)

Optional, user-selectable, support for use of DMA and I-cache during RBL execution (i.e.,while

loading UBL)

–

Supports booting from 8-bit NAND devices (16-bit NAND devices are not supported)

Supports 4-bit ECC (1-bit ECC is not supported)

Supports NAND flash that requires chip select to stay low during the tR read time

Supports Fast Boot option, which allows you to quickly boot and recover from a low power mode

•

ARM ROM Boot - MMC/SD Mode

–

No support for a full firmware boot. Instead, copies a second stage Uwer Boot Loader (UBL) from

MMC/SD to ARm Internal RAM (AIM) and transfers control to the user software.

–

Support for MMC/SD Native protocol (MMC/SD SPI protocol is not supported)

Support for descriptor error detection and retry (up to 24 times) when loading UBL

Support for up to 30KB UBL (32KB - ~2KB for RBL stack)

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

•

ARM ROM Boot - UART mode

–

No support for a full firmware boot. Instead, loads a second stage user boot loader (UBL) via UART

to ARM internal RAM (AIM) and transfers control to the user software.

–

Support for up to 30KB UBL (32KB - ~2KB for RBL stack)

The general boot sequence is shown in Figure 3-6. For more information, refer to the ARM Subsystem

User's Guide.

Reset

Boot

mode

Internal ROM

Boot

mode

Boot from

UART

Boot from

NAND flash

Boot OK ?

Yes

Boot OK ?

Yes

Boot from

MMC/SD

Boot OK ?

Yes

Invoke

OneNAND

Invoke loaded

Program

Figure 3-6. Boot Mode Functional Block Diagram

3.13 Power Management

The is designed for minimal power consumption. There are two components to power consumption: active

power and leakage power. Active power is the power consumed to perform work and scales with clock

frequency and the amount of computations being performed. Active power can be reduced by controlling

the clocks in such a way as to either operate at a clock setting just high enough to complete the required

operation in the required timeline or to run at a clock setting until the work is complete and then drastically

cut the clocks (e.g. to PLL Bypass mode) until additional work must be performed. Leakage power is due

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

to static current leakage and occurs regardless of the clock rate. Leakage, or standby power, is

unavoidable while power is applied and scales roughly with the operating junction temperatures. Leakage

power can only be avoided by removing power completely from a device or subsystem. The DM355

includes several power management features which are briefly described in Table 12-1. Refer to the ARM

Subsystem User's Guide for more information on power management.

Table 3-17. Power Management Features

Power Management Features

Description

Clock Management

Module clock disable

Module clocks can be disabled to reduce switching power

Module clock frequency scaling

PLL power-down

Module clock frequency can be scaled to reduce switching power

The PLLs can be powered-down when not in use to reduce

switching power

ARM Sleep Mode

Disable ARM clock to reduce active power

System Sleep Modes

ARM Wait-for-Interrupt sleep mode

Deep Sleep mode

Stop all device clocks and power down internal oscillators to reduce

active power to a minimum. Registers and memory are preserved.

I/O Management

USB Phy power-down

The USB Phy can be powered-down to reduce USB I/O power

The DAC's can be powered-down to reduce DAC power

DAC power-down

DDR self-refresh and power down

The DDR / mDDR device can be put into self-refresh and power

down states

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

3.14 64-Bit Crossbar Architecture

The DM355 uses a 64-bit crossbar architecture to control access between device processors, subsystems

and peripherals. It includes an EDMA Controller consisting of a DMA Transfer Controller (TC) and a DMA

Channel Controller (CC). The TC provides two DMA channels for transfer between slave peripherals. The

CC provides a user and event interface to the EDMA system. It includes up to 64 event channels to which

all system synchronization events can be mapped and 8 auto submit “quick” channels (QDMA). In most

ways, these channels are identical. A channel refers to a specific ‘event’ that can cause a transfer to be

submitted to the TC as a Transfer Request.

3.14.1 Crossbar Connections

There are five transfer masters (TCs have separate read and write connections) connected to the

crossbar; ARM, the Video Processing Sub-system (VPSS), the master peripherals (USB), and two EDMA

transfer controllers. These can be connected to four separate slave ports; ARM, the DDR EMIF, and CFG

bus peripherals. Not all masters may connect to all slaves. Connection paths are indicated by √ at

intersection points shown in Table 3-18

Table 3-18. Crossbar Connection Matrix

Slave Module

DMA Master

ARM Internal

Memory

MPEG/JPEG

Co-processor

Memory

Config Bus Registers and

Memory

DDR EMIF Memory

ARM

√

VPSS

DMA Master Peripherals (USB)

EDMA3TC0

√

EDMA3TC1

3.14.2 EDMA Controller

The EDMA controller handles all data transfers between memories and the device slave peripherals on

the DM355 device. These are summarized as follows:

•

Transfer to/from on-chip memories

–

ARM program/data RAM

MPEG/JPEG Co-processor memory

•

Transfer to/from external storage

–

DDR2 / mDDR SDRAM

Asynchronous EMIF

OneNAND flash

NAND flash

Smart Media, SD, MMC, xD media storage

•

Transfer to/from peripherals

–

ASP

SPI

I2C

PWM

RTO

GPIO

Timer/WDT

UART

MMC/SD

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

The EDMA Controller consists of two major blocks: the Transfer Controller (TC) and the Channel

Controller (CC). The CC is a highly flexible Channel Controller that serves as the user interface and event

interface for the EDMA system. The CC supports 64-event channels and 8 QDMA channels. The CC

consists of a scalable Parameter RAM (PaRAM) that supports flexible ping-pong, circular buffering,

channel-chaining, auto-reloading, and memory protection.

The EDMA Channel Controller has the following features:

•

Fully orthogonal transfer description

–

Three transfer dimensions

A-synchronized transfers: one dimension serviced per event

AB- synchronized transfers: two dimensions serviced per event

Independent indexes on source and destination

Chaining feature allows 3-D transfer based on single event

•

Flexible transfer definition

–

Increment and constant addressing modes

Linking mechanism allows automatic PaRAM set update

Chaining allows multiple transfers to execute with one event

•

Interrupt generation for:

–

DMA completion

Error conditions

Debug visibility

–

Queue watermarking/threshold

Error and status recording to facilitate debug

64 DMA channels

–

Event synchronization

Manual synchronization (CPU(s) write to event set register)

Chain synchronization (completion of one transfer chains to next)

•

8 QDMA channels

–

QDMA channels are triggered automatically upon writing to a PaRAM set entry

Support for programmable QDMA channel to PaRAM mapping

128 PaRAM sets

Each PaRAM set can be used for a DMA channel, QDMA channel, or link set (remaining)

–

•

Two transfer controllers/event queues. The system-level priority of these queues is user programmable

16 event entries per event queue

External events (for example, ASP TX Evt and RX Evt)

The EDMA Transfer Controller has the following features:

•

Two transfer controllers

64-bit wide read and write ports per channel

Up to four in-flight transfer requests (TR)

Programmable priority level

Supports two dimensional transfers with independent indexes on source and destination (EDMA3CC

manages the 3rd dimension)

•

Support for increment and constant addressing modes

Interrupt and error support

Parameter RAM: Each EDMA is specified by an eight word (32-byte) parameter table contained in

Parameter RAM (PaRAM) within the CC. DM355 provides 128 PaRAM entries, one for each of the 64

DMA channels and for 64 QDMA / Linked DMA entries.

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

DMA Channels: Can be triggered by: " External events (for example, ASP TX Evt and RX Evt), " Software

writing a '1' to the given bit location, or channel, of the Event Set register, or, " Chaining to other DMAs.

QDMA: The Quick DMA (QDMA) function is contained within the CC. DM355 implements 8 QDMA

channels. Each QDMA channel has a selectable PaRAM entry used to specify the transfer. A QDMA

transfer is submitted immediately upon writing of the "trigger" parameter (as opposed to the occurrence of

an event as with EDMA). The QDMA parameter RAM may be written by any Config bus master through

the Config Bus and by DMAs through the Config Bus bridge.

QDMA Channels: Triggered by a configuration bus write to a designated 'QDMA trigger word'. QDMAs

allow a minimum number of linear writes (optimized for GEM IDMA feature) to be issued to the CC to

force a series of transfers to take place.

3.14.2.1 EDMA Channel Synchronization Events

The EDMA supports up to 64 EDMA channels which service peripheral devices and external memory.

Table 3-19 lists the source of EDMA synchronization events associated with each of the programmable

EDMA channels. For the device, the association of an event to a channel is fixed; each of the EDMA

channels has one specific event associated with it. These specific events are captured in the EDMA event

registers (ER, ERH) even if the events are disabled by the EDMA event enable registers (EER, EERH).

For more detailed information on the EDMA module and how EDMA events are enabled, captured,

processed, linked, chained, and cleared, etc., see the Document Support section for the Enhanced Direct

Memory Access (EDMA) Controller Reference Guide.

Table 3-19. EDMA Channel Synchronization Events⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾

EDMA

CHANNEL

EVENT NAME

EVENT DESCRIPTION

TIMER3: TINT6

TIMER3 TINT7

ASP0: XEVT

ASP0: REVT

VPSS: EVT1

VPSS: EVT2

VPSS: EVT3

VPSS: EVT4

Timer 3 Interrupt (TINT6) Event

Timer 3 Interrupt (TINT7) Event

ASP0 Transmit Event

ASP0 Receive Event

VPSS Event 1

VPSS Event 2

VPSS Event 3

VPSS Event 4

ASP1: XEVT or TIMER2:

TINT4

ASP1 Transmit Event or Timer 2 interrupt (TINT4) Event

ASP1 Receive Event or Timer 2 interrupt (TINT5) Event

ASP1: REVT or TIMER2:

TINT5

SPI2: SPI2XEVT

SPI2: SPI2REVT

Reserved

SPI2 Transmit Event

SPI2 Receive Event

Reserved

SPI1: SPI1XEVT

SPI1: SPI1REVT

SPI0: SPI0XEVT

SPI0: SPI0REVT

UART0: URXEVT0

UART0: UTXEVT0

UART1: URXEVT1

SPI1 Transmit Event

SPI1 Receive Event

SP0I Transmit Event

SPI0 Receive Event

UART 0 Receive Event

UART 0 Transmit Event

UART 1 Receive Event

(1) In addition to the events shown in this table, each of the 64 channels can also be synchronized with the transfer completion or

intermediate transfer completion events. For more detailed information on EDMA event-transfer chaining, see the Document Support

section for the Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA) Controller Reference Guide.

(2) The total number of EDMA events in DM355 exceeds 64, which is the maximum value of the EDMA module. Therefore, several events

are multiplexed and you must use the register EDMA_EVTMUX in the System Control Module to select the event source for multiplexed

events. Refer to the ARM Subsystem Guide for more information on the System Control Module register EDMA_EVTMUX.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Detailed Device Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 3-19. EDMA Channel Synchronization Events (continued)

EDMA

CHANNEL

EVENT NAME

EVENT DESCRIPTION

UART1: UTXEVT1

UART2: URXEVT2

UART2: UTXEVT2

Reserved

UART 1 Transmit Event

UART 2 Receive Event

UART 2 Transmit Event

GPIO: GPINT9

GPIO 9 Interrupt Event

MMC0RXEVT or MEMSTK:

MSEVT

MMC/SD0 Receive Event

56 - 63

MMC0TXEVT

I2CREVT

MMC/SD0 Transmit Event

I2C Receive Event

I2CXEVT

I2C Transmit Event

MMC1RXEVT

MMC1TXEVT

GPINT0

MMC/SD1 Receive Event

MMC/SD1 Transmit Event

GPIO 0 Interrupt Event

GPIO 1 Interrupt Event

GPIO 2 Interrupt Event

GPIO 3 Interrupt Event

GPIO 4 Interrupt Event

GPIO 5 Interrupt Event

GPIO 6 Interrupt Event

GPIO 7 Interrupt Event

GPIO Bank 0 Interrupt Event

GPIO Bank 1 Interrupt Event

GPIO Bank 2 Interrupt Event

GPIO Bank 3 Interrupt Event

GPIO Bank 4 Interrupt Event

GPIO Bank 5 Interrupt Event

GPIO Bank 6 Interrupt Event

GPIO 8 Interrupt Event

Timer 0 Interrupt Event

Timer 1 Interrupt Event

Timer 2 Interrupt Event

Timer 3 Interrupt Event

PWM 0 Event

GPINT1

GPINT2

GPINT3

GPINT4

GPINT5

GPINT6

GPINT7

GPBNKINT0

GPBNKINT1

GPBNKINT2

GPBNKINT3

GPBNKINT4

GPBNKINT5

GPBNKINT6

GPINT8

TIMER0: TINT0

TIMER0: TINT1

TIMER1: TINT2

TIMER1: TINT3

PWM0

PWM1

PWM 1 Event

PWM2

PWM 2 Event

PWM3

PWM 3 Event

Reserved

3.15 MPEG/JPEG Overview

The DM355 supports the computational operations used for image processing, JPEG compression and

MPEG1,2,4 video and imaging standards.

Detailed Device Description

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

4 Device Operating Conditions

4.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating Case Temperature Range

(3)(4)

(Unless Otherwise Noted)

All 1.3 V supplies

-0.5 V to 1.7 V

-0.5 V to 2.5 V

-0.5 V to 1.89 V

-0.5 V to 4.4 V

-0.5 V to 2.3 V

-0.5 V to 3.8 V

0.0 V to 5.5 V

-20 mA to 20 mA

-0°C to 85 °C

All digital 1.8 V supplies

Supply voltage ranges

All analog 1.8 V supplies

All 3.3 V supplies

All 1.8 V I/Os

Input voltage ranges

All 3.3 V I/Os

VBUS

I_clamp

Clamp current for input or output⁽¹⁾

Operating case temperature ranges

Storage temperature ranges

T_c

T_stg

-65°C to 150 °C

(3) Stresses beyond those listed under "absolute maximum ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings

only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under "recommended operating

conditions" is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.

(4) All voltage values are with respect to V_SS.

(1) Clamp current flows from an input or output pad to a supply rail through a clamp circuit or an intrinsic diode. Positive current results from

an applied input or output voltage that is more than 0.5 V higher (more positive) than the supply voltage,

V_DD/V_{DDA_PLL*}/V_{DD_USB}/V_{DD_DDR}for dual-supply macros. Negative current results from an applied voltage that is more than 0.5 V less

(more negative) than the V_SSvoltage..

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Operating Conditions

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

4.2 Recommended Operating Conditions

MIN NOM

1.235

MAX UNIT

CV_DD

Supply voltage, Core

1.3

3.3

1.8

3.3

1.8

3.3

1.365

3.465

1.89

3.465

1.89

3.465

V_{DDA_PLL1}

V_{DDA_PLL2}

V_{DDD13_USB}

V_{DDA13_USB}

V_{DDA33_USB}

V_{DDA33_USB_PLL}

V_{DD_DDR}

V_{DDA33_DDRDLL}

V_{DD_VIN}

V_{DD_VOUT}

V_{DDA18_DAC}

V_DD

Supply voltage, PLL1

1.235

3.135

1.71

3.135

1.71

3.135

Supply voltage, PLL2

Supply voltage, USB Digital

Supply voltage, USB Analog

Supply voltage, USB Common PLL

Supply voltage, DDR2 / MDDR

Supply voltage, DDR DLL Analog

Supply voltage, Digital video In

Supply voltage, Digital Video Out

Supply voltage, DAC Analog

Supply voltage, I/Os

Supply Voltage

V_SS

Supply ground, Core, USB Digital

Supply ground, PLL1

V_{SSA_PLL1}

V_{SSA_PLL2}

V_{SS_USB}

V_{SSA_DLL}

V_{SSA_DAC}

V_{SS_MX1}

V_{SS_MX2}

V_IH

Supply ground, PLL2

Supply ground, USB

Supply Ground

Supply ground, DLL

Supply ground, DAC Analog

MXI1 osc ground⁽¹⁾

MXI2 osc ground⁽¹⁾

High-level input voltage⁽²⁾

Low-level input voltage⁽²⁾

DAC reference voltage

Voltage Input High

Voltage Input Low

V_IL

0.8

V_REF

450

2550

499

Ω

μF

R_BIAS

DAC full-scale current adjust resistor

Output resistor

DAC⁽³⁾

R_LOAD

C_BG

Bypass capacitor

0.1

Output resistor (ROUT), between TVOUT and

VFB pins

R_OUT

1070

Ω

Video Buffer⁽³⁾

R_FB

Feedback resistor, between VFB and IOUT pins.

DAC full-scale current adjust resistor

Bypass capacitor

1000

2550

0.1

R_BIAS

C_BG

Ω

μA

USB_VBUS

USB external charge pump input

USB reference resistor⁽⁴⁾

4.85

9.9

5.25

10.1

USB

kΩ

°C

Temperature

T_c

Operating case temperature rage

(1) Oscillator ground must be kept separate from other grounds and connected directly to the crystal load capacitor ground (see

Section 5.5.1).

(2) These I/O specifications apply to regular 3.3 V I/Os and do not apply to DDR2/mDDR, USB I/Os. DDR2/mDDR I/Os are 1.8 V I/Os and

adhere to JESD79-2A standard, USB I/Os adhere to USB2.0 spec.

(3) See Section 5.9.2.4. Also, resistors should be E-96 spec line (3 digits with 1% accuracy).

(4) Connect USB_R1 to V_{SS_USB_REF}via 10K ohm, 1% resistor placed as close to the device as possible. .

Device Operating Conditions

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

4.3 Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating

Case Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted)

(1)

PARAMETER

High-level output voltage⁽²⁾

TEST CONDITIONS

VDD=MIN, IOH=MAX

VDD=MIN, IOL=MAX

MIN

TYP

MAX UNIT

V_OH

V_OL

2.4

Voltage

Output

Low-level output voltage⁽²⁾

0.6

Input current for I/O without

internal pull-up/pull-down

I_I

V_I= VSS to VDD

-1

Input current for I/O with internal

pull-up⁽³⁾⁽⁴⁾

I_I(pullup)

190

Current

Input/Outp

Input current for I/O with internal

pull-down⁽³⁾⁽⁴⁾

I_I(pulldown)

-190

-40

μA

I_OH

I_OL

High-level output current

Low-level output current

-100

4000

V_O= VDD or VSS; internal pull

disabled

I_OZ

I/O off-state output current

±10

C_I

Input capacitance

Output capacitance

Resolution

Capacitan

C_O

Resolution

Bits

RLOAD = 499 Ω, Video buffer

INL

Integral non-linearity, best fit

LSB

disabled

DAC

RLOAD = 499 Ω, Video buffer

disabled

DNL

Differential non-linearity

Output compliance range

0.5

LSB

Compliance

V_OH(VIDBUF)

IFS = 1.4 mA, RLOAD = 499 Ω

0.700

Output high voltage (top of 75%

NTSC or PAL colorbar)⁽⁵⁾

1.55

Video

Buffer

Outpupt low voltage (bottom of

sync tip)

V_OL(VIDBUF)

0.470

(1) For test conditions shown as MIN, MAX, or NOM, use the appropriate value specified in the recommended operating conditions table.

(2) These I/O specifications apply to regular 3.3 V I/Os and do not apply to DDR2/mDDR, USB I/Os. DDR2/mDDR I/Os are 1.8 V I/Os and

adhere to JESD79-2A standard, USB I/Os adhere to USB2.0 spec.

(3) This specification applies only to pins with an internal pullup (PU) or pulldown (PD). See Section 2.4 or Section 2.5 for pin descriptions.

(4) To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor is recommended.

(5) 100% color bars are not supported. 100% color bars require 1.2 V peak-to-peak. The video buffer only provides 1.0 V peak-to-peak.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Device Operating Conditions

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

5.1 Parameter Information Device-Specific Information

Tester Pin Electronics

Data Sheet Timing Reference Point

42 Ω

3.5 nH

Output

Under

Test

Transmission Line

Z0 = 50 Ω

(see note)

Device Pin

(see note)

4.0 pF

1.85 pF

A. The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its

transmission line effects must be taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns or longer can be used to

produce the desired transmission line effect. The transmission line is intended as a load only. It is not necessary to

add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns or longer) from the data sheet timings.

Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the

device pin.

Figure 5-1. Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements

The load capacitance value stated is only for characterization and measurement of AC timing signals. This

load capacitance value does not indicate the maximum load the device is capable of driving.

5.1.1 Signal Transition Levels

All input and output timing parameters are referenced to V_reffor both "0" and "1" logic levels. For 3.3 V I/O,

V_ref= 1.65 V. For 1.8 V I/O, V_ref= 0.9 V.

ref

Figure 5-2. Input and Output Voltage Reference Levels for AC Timing Measurements

All rise and fall transition timing parameters are referenced to V_ILMAX and V_IHMIN for input clocks,

V_OLMAX and V_OHMIN for output clocks.

ref

= V MIN (or V MIN)

IH OH

ref

= V MAX (or V MAX)

IL OL

Figure 5-3. Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.1.2 Timing Parameters and Board Routing Analysis

The timing parameter values specified in this data sheet do not include delays by board routings. As a

good board design practice, such delays must always be taken into account. Timing values may be

adjusted by increasing/decreasing such delays. TI recommends utilizing the available I/O buffer

information specification (IBIS) models to analyze the timing characteristics correctly. To properly use IBIS

models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS Models for Timing

Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839). If needed, external logic hardware such as

buffers may be used to compensate any timing differences.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.2 Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition Behavior

All clocks and control signals should transition between V_IHand V_IL(or between V_ILand V_IH) in a

monotonic manner.

5.3 Power Supplies

The power supplies of DM355 are summarized in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1. Power Supplies

Customer Tolerance Package

Chip Plane

Name

Description

Comments

Board

Plane

Supply

1.3 V

±5%

1.3 V

CV_DD

Core V_DD

V_{DDA_PLL1}

V_{DDA_PLL2}

V_{DDD13_USB}

V_{DDA13_USB}

V_DD

PLL1 V_DDA

PLL2 V_DDA

USB 1.3 V supply

3.3 V

±5%

3.3 V

IO V_DDfor LVCMOS

IO V_DDfor MXI/O1

V_DDSHV

V_DDSHV1

V_DDSHV2

V_DD

IO V_DDfor MXI/O2

V_DD

IO V_DDfor ISB DRVVBUS

DDR DLL analog V_DD

Analog 3.3 V power USB PHY

V_{DDA33_DDRDLL}

V_{DDA33_USB}

V_{DDA33_USB_PLL}Common mode 3.3 V power for USB

PHY (PLL)

V_DD

IO V_DDfor peripherals

IO V_DDfor VideoIN I/F

IO V_DDfor VideoOUT I/F

3.3 V

±5%

3.3 V

V_{DD_VIN}

V_{DD_VOUT}

V_{DD_DDR}

V_DDA18

1.8 V

±5%

1.8 V

Analog 1.8 V power

V_{DDA18_DAC}

Place decoupling caps (0.1μF/10μf) close

to chip

0 V

n/a

0 V

V_{SS_MX1}

V_{SS_MX2}

V_SS

Connect to external crystal capacitor

ground

Connect to external crystal capacitor

ground

Chip ground

USB ESD ground

ground

V_SS

0 V

n/a

0 V

V_SSA

ground

Keep separate from digital ground V_SS

V_{SA_PLL1}

V_{SSA_PLL2}

V_{SSA_DLL}

V_{SS_USB}

PLL1 V_SSA

PLL2 V_SSA

DLL ground

USB ground

V_{SSA13_USB}

V_{SSA33_USB}

V_{SSA33_USB_PLL}

0 V

n/a

0 V

V_{SS_USB_REF}

V_{SSA_DAC}

USB PHY reference ground

DAC ground

V_SSREF

Keep separate from digital ground V_SS

V_DDSdivided by 2, through board resistors

Connect to external charge pump

V_DDS*0.5

5 V

V_DDS*0.5 V_REFSSTL

5 V USB_VBUS

DRR ref voltage

VBUS

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.3.1 Power-Supply Sequencing

In order to ensure device reliability, the DM355 requires the following power supply power-on and

power-off sequences. See table Table 5-1 for a description of DM355 power supplies.

Power-On:

1. Power on 1.3 V: CV_DD, V_{DDA_PLL1/2}, V_{DDD13_USB}, V_{DDA13_USB}

2. Power on 1.8 V: V_{DD_DDR}, V_DDA18, V_{DDA18_DAC}

3. Power on 3.3 V: D_VDD, V_{DDA33_DDRDLL}, V_{DDA33_USB}, V_{DDA33_USB_PLL}, V_{DD_VIN}, V_{DD_VOUT}

You may power-on the 1.8 V and 3.3 V power supplies simultaneously.

Power-Off:

1. Power off 3.3 V: D_VDD, V_{DDA33_DDRDLL}, V_{DDA33_USB}, V_{DDA33_USB_PLL}, V_{DD_VIN}, V_{DD_VOUT}

2. Power off 1.8 V: V_{DD_DDR}, V_DDA18, V_{DDA18_DAC}

3. Power off 1.3 V: CV_DD, V_{DDA_PLL1/2}, V_{DDD13_USB}, V_{DDA13_USB}

You may power-off the 1.8 V and 3.3 V power supplies simultaneously.

Note that when booting the DM355 from OneNAND, you must ensure that the OneNAND device is ready

with valid program instructions before the DM355 attempts to read program instructions from it. In

particular, before you release DM355 reset, you must allow time for OneNAND device power to stabilize

and for the OneNAND device to complete its internal copy routine. During the internal copy routine, the

OneNAND device copies boot code from its internal non-volatile memory to its internal boot memory

section. Board designers typically achieve this requirement by design of the system power and reset

supervisor circuit. Refer to your OneNAND device datasheet for OneNAND power ramp and stabilization

times and for OneNAND boot copy times.

5.3.1.1 Power-Supply Design Considerations

Core and I/O supply voltage regulators should be located close to the DM355 to minimize inductance and

resistance in the power delivery path. Additionally, when designing for high-performance applications

utilizing the device, the PC board should include separate power planes for core, I/O, and ground, all

bypassed with high-quality low-ESL/ESR capacitors.

5.3.1.2 Power-Supply Decoupling

In order to properly decouple the supply planes from system noise, place as many capacitors (caps) as

possible close to . These caps need to be close to the power pins, no more than 1.25 cm maximum

distance to be effective. Physically smaller caps, such as 0402, are better because of their lower parasitic

inductance. Proper capacitance values are also important. Small bypass caps (near 560 pF) should be

closest to the power pins. Medium bypass caps (220 nF or as large as can be obtained in a small

package) should be next closest. TI recommends no less than 8 small and 8 medium caps per supply be

placed immediately next to the BGA vias, using the "interior" BGA space and at least the corners of the

"exterior".

Larger caps for each supply can be placed further away for bulk decoupling. Large bulk caps (on the order

of 100 μF) should be furthest away, but still as close as possible. Large caps for each supply should be

placed outside of the BGA footprint.

Any cap selection needs to be evaluated from a yield/manufacturing point-of-view. As with the selection of

any component, verification of capacitor availability over the product’s production lifetime should be

considered. See also Section 5.5.1 and Section 5.5.2 for additional recommendations on power supplies

for the oscillator/PLL supplies.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.4 Reset

5.4.1 Reset Electrical Data/Timing

Table 5-2. Timing Requirements for Reset ⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾(see Figure 5-4)

DM355

NO.

UNIT

MIN

12C

MAX

t_w(RESET)

t_su(BOOT)

t_h(BOOT)

Active low width of the RESET pulse

Setup time, boot configuration pins valid before RESET rising edge

Hold time, boot configuration pins valid after RESET rising edge

(1) BTSEL[1:0] and AECFG[4:0] are the boot configuration pins during device reset.

(2) C = MXI/CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when MXI/CLKIN frequency is 24 MHz use C = 41.6 ns.

RESET

Boot Configuration Pins

(BTSEL[1:0], AECFG[3:0])

Figure 5-4. Reset Timing

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.5 Oscillators and Clocks

has two oscillator input/output pairs (MXI1/MXO1 and MXI2/MXO2) usable with external crystals or

ceramic resonators to provide clock inputs. The optimal frequencies for the crystals are 24 MHz

(MXI1/MXO1) and 27 MHz (MXI2/MXO2). Optionally, the oscillator inputs are configurable for use with

external clock oscillators. If external clock oscillators are used, to minimize the clock jitter, a single clean

power supply should power both the and the external oscillator circuit and the minimum CLKIN rise and

fall times must be observed. The electrical requirements and characteristics are described in this section.

The timing parameters for CLKOUT[3:1] are also described in this section. The has three output clock pins

(CLKOUT[3:1]). See Section 3.5 and Section 3.6 for more information on CLKOUT[3:1].

5.5.1 MXI1 (24-MHz) Oscillator

The MXI1 (typically 24 MHz, can also be 36 MHz) oscillator provides the primary reference clock for the

device. The on-chip oscillator requires an external crystal connected across the MXI1 and MXO1 pins,

along with two load capacitors, as shown in Figure 5-5. The external crystal load capacitors must be

connected only to the oscillator ground pin (V_{SS_MX1}). Do not connect to board ground (V_SS). Also, the PLL

power pin (V_{DDA_PLL1}) should be connected to the power supply through a ferrite bead, L1 in the example

circuit shown in Figure 5-5.

MXO1

MXI1/CLKIN

SS_MX1

DDA_PLL1

SSA_PLL1

0.1

Crystal

24 MHz or

36 MHz

Figure 5-5. MXI1 (24-MHz) Oscillator

The load capacitors, C1 and C2, should be chosen such that the equation is satisfied (typical values are

C1 = C2 = 10 pF). CL in the equation is the load specified by the crystal manufacturer. All discrete

components used to implement the oscillator circuit should be placed as close as possible to the

associated oscillator pins (MXI1 and MXO1) and to the V_{SS_MX1}pin.

C₁C₂

C_L

(C₁C₂)

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 5-3. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for 24-MHz System

Oscillator

PARAMETER

MIN

TYP

MAX

UNIT

Start-up time (from power up until oscillating at stable frequency)

Oscillation frequency

ESR

24 or 36

MHz

Ω

Frequency stability

+/-50

ppm

5.5.2 MXI2 (27-MHz) Oscillator (optional oscillator)

The MXI2 (27 MHz) oscillator provides an optional reference clock for the 's VPSS module. The on-chip

oscillator requires an external 27-MHz crystal connected across the MXI2 and MXO2 pins, along with two

load capacitors, as shown in Figure 5-6. The external crystal load capacitors must be connected only to

the 27-MHz oscillator ground pin (V_{SS_MX2}). Do not connect to board ground (V_SS). Also, the PLL power

pin (V_{DDA_PLL2}) should be connected to the power supply through a ferrite bead, L1 in the example circuit

shown in Figure 5-6.

MXO2

SSA_PLL2

MXI2

SS_MX2

DDA_PLL2

Crystal

27 MHz

0.1

Figure 5-6. MXI2 (27-MHz) System Oscillator

The load capacitors, C1 and C2, should be chosen such that the equation is satisfied (typical values are

C1 = C2 = 10 pF). CL in the equation is the load specified by the crystal manufacturer. All discrete

components used to implement the oscillator circuit should be placed as close as possible to the

associated oscillator pins (MXI and MXO) and to the V_{SS_MX2}pin.

C₁C₂

C_L

(C₁C₂)

Table 5-4. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for 27-MHz System

Oscillator

PARAMETER

MIN

TYP

MAX

UNIT

Start-up time (from power up until oscillating at stable frequency)

Oscillation frequency

ESR

MHz

Ω

Frequency stability

+/-50

ppm

100

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.5.3 Clock PLL Electrical Data/Timing (Input and Output Clocks)

Table 5-5. Timing Requirements for MXI1/CLKIN1⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾(see Figure 5-7)

DM355

TYP

UNIT

MIN

27.7⁽³⁾

0.45C

MAX

t_c(MXI1)

t_w(MXI1H)

t_w(MXI1L)

t_t(MXI1)

Cycle time, MXI1/CLKIN1

41.6⁽³⁾ns

0.55C ns

0.05C ns

0.02C ns

Pulse duration, MXI1/CLKIN1 high

Pulse duration, MXI1/CLKIN1 low

Transition time, MXI1/CLKIN1

Period jitter, MXI1/CLKIN1

t_J(MXI1)

(1) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V_ILMAX and V_IHMIN.

(2) C = MXI1/CLKIN1 cycle time in ns. For example, when MXI1/CLKIN1 frequency is 24 MHz use C = 41.6 ns.

(3) tc(MXI1) = 41.6 ns and tc(MXI1) = 27.7 ns are the only supported cycle times for MXI1/CLKIN1.

MXI/CLKIN

Figure 5-7. MXI1/CLKIN1 Timing

Table 5-6. Timing Requirements for MXI2/CLKIN2⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾(see Figure 5-7)

NO.

DM355

UNIT

MIN

37.037⁽³⁾

0.45C

TYP

MAX

t_c(MXI2)

t_w(MXI2H)

t_w(MXI2L)

t_t(MXI2)

Cycle time, MXI2/CLKIN2

37.037⁽³⁾ns

0.55C ns

0.05C ns

0.02C ns

Pulse duration, MXI2/CLKIN2 high

Pulse duration, MXI2/CLKIN2 low

Transition time, MXI2/CLKIN2

Period jitter, MXI2/CLKIN2

0.45C

t_J(MXI2)

(1) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V_ILMAX and V_IHMIN.

(2) C = MXI2/CLKIN2 cycle time in ns. For example, when MXI2/CLKIN2 frequency is 27 MHz use C = 37.037 ns.

(3) tc(MXI2) = 37.037 ns is the only supported cycle time for MXI2/CLKIN2.

MXI/CLKIN

Figure 5-8. MXI2/CLKIN2 Timing

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 5-7. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT1⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾(see

Figure 5-9)

DM355

TYP

UNI

NO.

PARAMETER

MIN

MAX

t_C(CLKOUT1)

t_w(CLKOUT1H)

t_w(CLKOUT1L)

t_t(CLKOUT1)

Cycle time, CLKOUT1

t_c(MXI1)

0.45P

Pulse duration, CLKOUT1 high

Pulse duration, CLKOUT1 low

Transition time, CLKOUT1

0.55P

0.05P

t_d(MXI1H-

CLKOUT1H)

t_d(MXI1L-

Delay time, MXI1/CLKIN1 high to CLKOUT1 high

Delay time, MXI1/CLKIN1I low to CLKOUT1 low

CLKOUT1L)

(1) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V_OLMAX and V_OHMIN.

(2) P = 1/CLKOUT1 clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when CLKOUT1 frequency is 24 MHz use P = 41.6 ns.

MXI/CLKIN

CLKOUT1

Figure 5-9. CLKOUT1 Timing

Table 5-8. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT2⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾(see

Figure 5-10)

DM355

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

t_c(MXI1)/3

0.45P

TYP

MAX

t_C(CLKOUT2)

Cycle time, CLKOUT2

t_w(CLKOUT2H)Pulse duration, CLKOUT2 high

t_w(CLKOUT2L)Pulse duration, CLKOUT2 low

0.55P

0.05P

0.45P

t_t(CLKOUT2)

Transition time, CLKOUT2

t_d(MXI1H-

CLKOUT2H)

t_d(MXI1L-

Delay time, MXI1/CLKIN1 high to CLKOUT2 high

Delay time, MXI1/CLKIN1 low to CLKOUT2 low

CLKOUT2L)

(1) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V_OLMAX and V_OHMIN.

(2) P = 1/CLKOUT2 clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when CLKOUT2 frequency is 8 MHz use P = 125 ns.

MXI/CLKIN

CLKOUT2

Figure 5-10. CLKOUT2 Timing

102

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 5-9. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT3⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾(see

Figure 5-11)

DM355

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

t_c(MXI1)/8

0.45P

TYP

MAX

t_C(CLKOUT3)

t_w(CLKOUT3H)

t_w(CLKOUT3L)

t_t(CLKOUT3)

Cycle time, CLKOUT3

Pulse duration, CLKOUT3 high

Pulse duration, CLKOUT3 low

Transition time, CLKOUT3

0.55P

0.05P

0.45P

t_d(MXI2H-

CLKOUT3H)

t_d(MXI2L-

Delay time, CLKIN/MXI high to CLKOUT3 high

Delay time, CLKIN/MXI low to CLKOUT3 low

CLKOUT3L)

(1) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at V_OLMAX and V_OHMIN.

(2) P = 1/CLKOUT3 clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when CLKOUT3 frequency is 3 MHz use P = 333.3 ns.

MXI/CLKIN

CLKOUT3

Figure 5-11. CLKOUT3 Timing

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.6 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)

The GPIO peripheral provides general-purpose pins that can be configured as either inputs or outputs.

When configured as an output, a write to an internal register can control the state driven on the output pin.

When configured as an input, the state of the input is detectable by reading the state of an internal

interrupt/event generation modes. The GPIO peripheral provides generic connections to external devices.

The GPIO pins are grouped into banks of 16 pins per bank (i.e., bank 0 consists of GPIO [0:15]). There

are a total of 7 GPIO banks in the , because the has 104 GPIOs.

The GPIO peripheral supports the following:

•

Up to 104 3.3v GPIO pins, GPIO[103:0]

Interrupts:

–

Up to 10 unique GPIO[9:0] interrupts from Bank 0

Up to 7 GPIO (bank aggregated) interrupt signals, one from each of the 7 banks of GPIOs

Interrupts can be triggered by rising and/or falling edge, specified for each interrupt capable GPIO

signal

•

DMA events:

–

Up to 10 unique GPIO DMA events from Bank 0

Up to 7 GPIO (bank aggregated) DMA event signals, one from each of the 7 banks of GPIOs

Set/clear functionality: Firmware writes 1 to corresponding bit position(s) to set or to clear GPIO

signal(s). This allows multiple firmware processes to toggle GPIO output signals without critical section

protection (disable interrupts, program GPIO, re-enable interrupts, to prevent context switching to

anther process during GPIO programming).

•

Separate Input/Output registers

Output register in addition to set/clear so that, if preferred by firmware, some GPIO output signals can

be toggled by direct write to the output register(s).

•

Output register, when read, reflects output drive status. This, in addition to the input register reflecting

pin status and open-drain I/O cell, allows wired logic be implemented.

For more detailed information on GPIOs, see the Documentation Support section for the General-Purpose

Input/Output (GPIO) Reference Guide.

5.6.1 GPIO Peripheral Input/Output Electrical Data/Timing

Table 5-10. Timing Requirements for GPIO Inputs (see Figure 5-12)

DM355

NO.

UNIT

MIN

MAX

t_w(GPIH)

t_w(GPIL)

Pulse duration, GPIx high

Pulse duration, GPIx low

Table 5-11. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPIO Outputs

(see Figure 5-12)

DM355

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

26⁽¹⁾

MAX

t_w(GPOH)

t_w(GPOL)

Pulse duration, GPOx high

Pulse duration, GPOx low

(1) This parameter value should not be used as a maximum performance specification. Actual performance of back-to-back accesses of the

GPIO is dependent upon internal bus activity.

104

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

GPIx

GPOx

Figure 5-12. GPIO Port Timing

5.6.2 GPIO Peripheral External Interrupts Electrical Data/Timing

Table 5-12. Timing Requirements for External Interrupts/EDMA Events⁽¹⁾(see Figure 5-13)

DM355

NO.

UNIT

MIN

MAX

t_w(ILOW)

t_w(IHIGH)

Width of the external interrupt pulse low

Width of the external interrupt pulse high

(1) The pulse width given is sufficient to generate an interrupt or an EDMA event. However, if a user wants to have to recognize the GPIO

changes through software polling of the GPIO register, the GPIO duration must be extended to allow enough time to access the GPIO

EXT_INTx

Figure 5-13. GPIO External Interrupt Timing

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.7 External Memory Interface (EMIF)

supports several memory and external device interfaces, including:

•

Asynchronous EMIF (AEMIF) for interfacing to SRAM.

OneNAND flash memories

NAND flash memories

5.7.1 Asynchronous EMIF (AEMIF)

The EMIF supports the following features:

•

SRAM, etc. on up to 2 asynchronous chip selects addressable up to 64KB each

Supports 8-bit or 16-bit data bus widths

Programmable asynchronous cycle timings

Supports extended wait mode

Supports Select Strobe mode

5.7.1.1 NAND (NAND, SmartMedia, xD)

The NAND features of the EMIF are as follows:

•

NAND flash on up to 2 asynchronous chip selects

8 and 16-bit data bus widths

Programmable cycle timings

Performs 1-bit and 4-bit ECC calculation

NAND Mode also supports SmartMedia/SSFDC (Solid State Floppy Disk Controller) and xD memory

cards

5.7.1.2 OneNAND

The OneNAND features supported are as follows.

•

NAND flash on up to 2 asynchronous chip selects

Only 16-bit data bus widths

Supports asynchronous writes and reads

Supports synchronous reads with continuous linear burst mode (Does not support synchronous reads

with wrap burst modes)

•

Programmable cycle timings for each chip select in asynchronous mode

106

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.7.1.3 AEMIF Electrical Data/Timing

Table 5-13. Timing Requirements for Asynchronous Memory Cycles for AEMIF Module⁽¹⁾(see Figure 5-14

and Figure 5-15)

DM355

Nom

UNIT

MIN

MAX

READS and WRITES

Pulse duration, EM_WAIT assertion and

deassertion

t_{w(EM_WAIT)}

READS

12 t_{su(EMDV-EMOEH)}Setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid before EM_OE high

13 t_{h(EMOEH-EMDIV)}

Hold time, EM_D[15:0] valid after EM_OE high

t_su(EMOEL-

EMWAIT)

Delay time from EM_OE low to EM_WAIT

asserted⁽²⁾

READS (OneNAND Synchronous Burst Read)

Setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid before EM_CLK

high

30 t_{su(EMDV-EMCLKH)}

31 t_{h(EMCLKH-EMDIV)}Hold time, EM_D[15:0] valid after EM_CLK high

WRITES

Delay time from EM_WE low to EM_WAIT

asserted⁽²⁾

t_su(EMWEL-

EMWAIT)

(1) E = PLLC1 SYSCLK2 period in ns. SYSCLK2 is the EMIF peripheral clock. SYSCLK2 is one-fourth the PLLC output clock. For example,

when PLLC output clock = 432 MHz, E = 9.259 ns. See Section 3.5 for more information.

(2) Setup before end of STROBE phase (if no extended wait states are inserted) by which EM_WAIT must be asserted to add extended

wait states. Figure 5-16 and Figure 5-17 describe EMIF transactions that include extended wait states inserted during the STROBE

phase. However, cycles inserted as part of this extended wait period should not be counted; the 4E requirement is to the start of where

the HOLD phase would begin if there were no extended wait cycles.

Table 5-14. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Asynchronous

Memory Cycles for AEMIF Module^(1)(2)(3)(see Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15)

DM355

UNI

NO.

PARAMETER

MIN

Nom

MAX

READS and WRITES

READS

t_{d(TURNAROUND)}

Turn around time

(TA)*E

EMIF read cycle time (EW = 0)

EMIF read cycle time (EW = 1)

(RS+RST+RH)*E

t_c(EMRCYCLE)

(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*

16))*E

Output setup time, EM_CE[1:0] low to

EM_OE low (SS = 0)

(RS)*E

t_{su(EMCEL-EMOEL)}

Output setup time, EM_CE[1:0] low to

EM_OE low (SS = 1)

(RH)*E

Output hold time, EM_OE high to

EM_CE[1:0] high (SS = 0)

t_{h(EMOEH-EMCEH)}

Output hold time, EM_OE high to

EM_CE[1:0] high (SS = 1)

(1) TA = Turn around, RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold,

MEWC = Maximum external wait cycles. These parameters are programmed via the Asynchronous Bank and Asynchronous Wait Cycle

Configuration Registers. These support the following range of values: TA[4-1], RS[16-1], RST[64-1], RH[8-1], WS[16-1], WST[64-1],

WH[8-1], and MEW[1-256]. See the TMS320DM355 DMSoC Asynchronous External Memory Interface (EMIF) User's Guide (SPRUED1)

for more information.

(2) E = PLLC1 SYSCLK2 period in ns. SYSCLK2 is the EMIF peripheral clock. SYSCLK2 is one-fourth the PLLC output clock. For example,

when PLLC output clock = 432 MHz, E = 9.259 ns. See Section 3.5 for more information

(3) EWC = external wait cycles determined by EM_WAIT input signal. EWC supports the following range of values EWC[256-1]. Note that

the maximum wait time before timeout is specified by bit field MEWC in the Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register. See the

TMS320DM355 DMSoC Asynchronous External Memory Interface (EMIF) User's Guide (SPRUED1) for more information.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 5-14. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Asynchronous

Memory Cycles for AEMIF Module (see Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15) (continued)

DM355

UNI

NO.

PARAMETER

MIN

Nom

MAX

Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to

EM_OE low

t_{su(EMBAV-EMOEL)}

t_{h(EMOEH-EMBAIV)}

t_{su(EMBAV-EMOEL)}

t_{h(EMOEH-EMAIV)}

(RS)*E

Output hold time, EM_OE high to

EM_BA[1:0] invalid

(RH)*E

(RS)*E

(RH)*E

Output setup time, EM_A[13:0] valid to

EM_OE low

Output hold time, EM_OE high to

EM_A[13:0] invalid

EM_OE active low width (EW = 0)

EM_OE active low width (EW = 1)

(RST)*E

10 t_w(EMOEL)

(RST+(EWC*16))*E

t_d(EMWAITH-

EMOEH)

Delay time from EM_WAIT deasserted to

EM_OE high

READS (OneNAND Synchronous Burst Read)

32 f_{c(EM_CLK)}

Frequency, EM_CLK

Cycle time, EM_CLK

33 t_{c(EM_CLK)}

t_{su(EM_ADVV-}

1000 ns

Output setup time, EM_ADV valid before

EM_CLK high

EM_CLKH)

t_{h(EM_CLKH-}

EM_ADVIV)

Output hold time, EM_CLK high to EM_ADV

invalid

t_{su(EM_AV-}

EM_CLKH)

Output setup time, EM_A[13:0]/EM_BA[1]

valid before EM_CLK high

t_{h(EM_CLKH-}

EM_AIV)

Output hold time, EM_CLK high to

EM_A[13:0]/EM_BA[1] invalid

38 t_{w(EM_CLKH)}

Pulse duration, EM_CLK high

Pulse duration, EM_CLK low

t_{c(EM_CLK)}/3

39 t_{w(EM_CLKL)}

WRITES

EMIF write cycle time (EW = 0)

EMIF write cycle time (EW = 1)

(WS+WST+WH)*E

15 t_c(EMWCYCLE)

(WS+WST+WH+(EW

C*16))*E

Output setup time, EM_CE[1:0] low to

EM_WE low (SS = 0)

(WS)*E

16 t_{su(EMCEL-EMWEL)}

Output setup time, EM_CE[1:0] low to

EM_WE low (SS = 1)

Output hold time, EM_WE high to

EM_CE[1:0] high (SS = 0)

(WH)*E

17 t_{h(EMWEH-EMCEH)}

Output hold time, EM_WE high to

EM_CE[1:0] high (SS = 1)

Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to

EM_WE low

20 t_{su(EMBAV-EMWEL)}

21 t_{h(EMWEH-EMBAIV)}

22 t_{su(EMAV-EMWEL)}

23 t_{h(EMWEH-EMAIV)}

(WS)*E

(WH)*E

(WS)*E

(WH)*E

Output hold time, EM_WE high to

EM_BA[1:0] invalid

Output setup time, EM_A[13:0] valid to

EM_WE low

Output hold time, EM_WE high to

EM_A[13:0] invalid

EM_WE active low width (EW = 0)

EM_WE active low width (EW = 1)

(WST)*E

24 t_w(EMWEL)

(WST+(EWC*16))*E

t_d(EMWAITH-

EMWEH)

Delay time from EM_WAIT deasserted to

EM_WE high

Output setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid to

EM_WE low

26 t_{su(EMDV-EMWEL)}

(WS)*E

108

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 5-14. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Asynchronous

Memory Cycles for AEMIF Module (see Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15) (continued)

DM355

UNI

NO.

PARAMETER

MIN

Nom

MAX

Output hold time, EM_WE high to

EM_D[15:0] invalid

27 t_{h(EMWEH-EMDIV)}

(WH)*E

EM_CE[1:0]

EM_BA[1:0]

EM_A[13:0]

EM_OE

EM_D[15:0]

EM_WE

Figure 5-14. Asynchronous Memory Read Timing for EMIF

EM_CE[1:0]

EM_BA[1:0]

EM_A[13:0]

EM_WE

EM_D[15:0]

EM_OE

Figure 5-15. Asynchronous Memory Write Timing for EMIF

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

SETUP

STROBE

Extended Due to EM_WAIT

STROBE HOLD

EM_CE[1:0]

EM_BA[1:0]

EM_A[13:0]

EM_D[15:0]

EM_OE

EM_WAIT

Asserted

Deasserted

Figure 5-16. EM_WAIT Read Timing Requirements

SETUP

STROBE

Extended Due to EM_WAIT

STROBE HOLD

EM_CE[1:0]

EM_BA[1:0]

EM_A[13:0]

EM_D[15:0]

EM_WE

Asserted

Deasserted

EM_WAIT

Figure 5-17. EM_WAIT Write Timing Requirements

110

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

EM_CLK

EM_CE[1:0]

EM_ADV

EM_BA0,

EM_A[13:0],

EM_BA1

Da+n+1

EM_D[15:0]

EM_OE

Da+1

Da+2

Da+3

Da+4

Da+5

Da+n

EM_WAIT

Figure 5-18. Synchronous OneNAND Flash Read Timing

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.7.2 DDR2 Memory Controller

The DDR2 / mDDR Memory Controller is a dedicated interface to DDR2 / mDDR SDRAM. It supports

JESD79D-2A standard compliant DDR2 SDRAM devices and compliant Mobile DDR SDRAM devices.

DDR2 / mDDR SDRAM plays a key role in a DM355-based system. Such a system is expected to require

a significant amount of high-speed external memory for all of the following functions:

•

Buffering of input image data from sensors or video sources

Intermediate buffering for processing/resizing of image data in the VPFE

Numerous OSD display buffers

Intermediate buffering for large raw Bayer data image files while performing image processing

functions

•

Buffering for intermediate data while performing video encode and decode functions

Storage of executable code for the ARM

The DDR2 / mDDR Memory Controller supports the following features:

•

JESD79D-2A standard compliant DDR2 SDRAM

Mobile DDR SDRAM

256 MByte memory space

Data bus width 16 bits

CAS latencies:

–

DDR2: 2, 3, 4, and 5

mDDR: 2 and 3

•

Internal banks:

–

DDR2: 1, 2, 4, and 8

mDDR: 1, 2, and 4

•

Burst length: 8

Burst type: sequential

•

1 CS signal

Page sizes: 256, 512, 1024, and 2048

SDRAM autoinitialization

Self-refresh mode

Partial array self-refresh (for mDDR)

Power down mode

Prioritized refresh

Programmable refresh rate and backlog counter

Programmable timing parameters

Little endian

For details on the DDR2 Memory Controller, refer to the DDR/mDDR Peripheral Reference Guide.

5.7.2.1 DDR2/mDDR Memory Controller Electrical Data/Timing

TI only supports DDR2/mDDR board designs that follow the guidelines described in the application note

titled TMS320DM355 DDR2 / mDDR Board Design Application Note. Refer to this application note for

information on board design recommendations and guidelines for DDR2 and mDDR.

112

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.8 MMC/SD

The DM355 includes two separate MMC/SD Controllers which are compliant with MMC V3.31, Secure

Digital Part 1 Physical Layer Specification V1.1 and Secure Digital Input Output (SDIO) V1.0

specifications.

The MMC/SD Controller has following features:

•

MultiMediaCard (MMC).

Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card.

MMC/SD protocol support.

SDIO protocol support.

Programmable clock frequency.

256 bit Read/Write FIFO to lower system overhead.

Slave EDMA transfer capability.

The MMC/SD Controller does not support SPI mode.

5.8.1 MMC/SD Electrical Data/Timing

Table 5-15. Timing Requirements for MMC/SD Module

(see Figure 5-20 and Figure 5-22)

DM355

FAST MODE STANDARD MODE UNIT

NO.

MIN

2.5⁽¹⁾

MAX

MIN

MAX

t_{su(CMDV-CLKH)}Setup time, SD_CMD valid before SD_CLK high

t_h(CLKH-CMDV)

t_{su(DATV-CLKH)}

t_h(CLKH-DATV)

Hold time, SD_CMD valid after SD_CLK high

Setup time, SD_DATx valid before SD_CLK high

Hold time, SD_DATx valid after SD_CLK high

2.5

(1) For this parameter, you may include margin in your board design so that the toh = 2.5 ns of the MMC/SD device is not degraded at the

DM355 input pin.

Table 5-16. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for MMC/SD Module

(see Figure 5-19 through Figure 5-22)

DM355

STANDARD

NO.

PARAMETER

FAST MODE

UNIT

MODE

MIN

MAX

f_(CLK)

Operating frequency, SD_CLK

25 MHz

400 KHz

f_{(CLK_ID)}

t_W(CLKL)

Identification mode frequency, SD_CLK

Pulse width, SD_CLK low

Pulse width, SD_CLK high

Rise time, SD_CLK

400

10 t_W(CLKH)

11 t_r(CLK)

12 t_f(CLK)

10 ns

Fall time, SD_CLK

t_d(CLKL-

CMD)

Delay time, SD_CLK low to SD_CMD transition

-7.5

14 ns

14 t_d(CLKL-DAT)Delay time, SD_CLK low to SD_DATx transition

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

SD_CLK

START

XMIT

Valid

END

SD_CMD

Figure 5-19. MMC/SD Host Command Timing

SD_CLK

SD_CMD

Valid

START

XMIT

Valid

END

Figure 5-20. MMC/SD Card Response Timing

SD_CLK

START

END

SD_DATx

Figure 5-21. MMC/SD Host Write Timing

SD_CLK

Start

SD_DATx

End

Figure 5-22. MMC/SD Host Read and Card CRC Status Timing

114

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.9 Video Processing Sub-System (VPSS) Overview

The contains a Video Processing Sub-System (VPSS) that provides an input interface (Video Processing

Front End or VPFE) for external imaging peripherals such as image sensors, video decoders, etc.; and an

output interface (Video Processing Back End or VPBE) for display devices, such as analog SDTV

displays, digital LCD panels, HDTV video encoders, etc.

In addition to these peripherals, there is a set of common buffer memory and DMA control to ensure

efficient use of the DDR2 burst bandwidth. The shared buffer logic/memory is a unique block that is

tailored for seamlessly integrating the VPSS into an image/video processing system. It acts as the primary

source or sink to all the VPFE and VPBE modules that are either requesting or transferring data from/to

DDR2. In order to efficiently utilize the external DDR2 bandwidth, the shared buffer logic/memory

interfaces with the DMA system via a high bandwidth bus (64-bit wide). The shared buffer logic/memory

also interfaces with all the VPFE and VPBE modules via a 128-bit wide bus. The shared buffer

logic/memory (divided into the read & write buffers and arbitration logic) is capable of performing the

following functions. It is imperative that the VPSS utilize DDR2 bandwidth efficiently due to both its large

bandwidth requirements and the real-time requirements of the VPSS modules. Because it is possible to

configure the VPSS modules in such a way that DDR2 bandwidth is exceeded, a set of user accessible

registers is provided to monitor overflows or failures in data transfers.

5.9.1 Video Processing Front-End (VPFE)

The VPFE or Video Processing Front-End block is comprised of the CCD Controller (CCDC), Image Pipe

(IPIPE), and Hardware 3A Statistic Generator (H3A). These modules are described in the sections that

follow.

5.9.1.1 CCD Controller (CCDC)

The CCDC is responsible for accepting raw (unprocessed) image/video data from a sensor (CMOS or

CCD). In addition, the CCDC can accept YUV video data in numerous formats, typically from so-called

video decoder devices. In the case of raw inputs, the CCDC output requires additional image processing

to transform the raw input image to the final processed image. This processing can be done either

on-the-fly in the Preview Engine hardware ISP or in software on the ARM and MPEG/JPEG co-processor

subsystems. In parallel, raw data input to the CCDC can also used for computing various statistics (3A,

Histogram) to eventually control the image/video tuning parameters. The CCDC is programmed via control

and parameter registers. DM355 performance is enhanced by its dedicated hard-wired MPEG/JPEG

co-processor (MJCP). The MJCP performs all the computational operations required for JPE and MPEG4

compression. These operations can be invoked using the xDM (xDIAS for Digital Media) APIs. For more

information, refer to the xDIAS-DM (xDIAS for Digital Media) User's Guide (SPRUEC8). The following

features are supported by the CCDC module.

•

Support for conventional Bayer pattern.

Generates HD/VD timing signals and field ID to an external timing generator or can synchronize to the

external timing generator.

•

Support for progressive and interlaced sensors (hardware support for up to 2 fields and firmware

support for higher number of fields, typically 3-, 4-, and 5-field sensors).

•

Support for up to 67.5 MHz sensor clock (270-MHz speed grade device)

Support for REC656/CCIR-656 standard (YCbCr 422 format, either 8- or 16-bit).

Support for YCbCr 422 format, either 8- or 16-bit with discrete H and VSYNC signals.

Support for up to 14-bit input.

Support for color space conversion

Generates optical black clamping signals.

Support for shutter signal control.

Support for digital clamping and black level compensation.

Fault pixel correction based on a lookup table that contains row and column position of the pixel to be

corrected.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

•

Support for program lens shading correction.

Support for 10-bit to 8-bit A-law compression.

Support for a low-pass filter prior to writing to SDRAM. If this filter is enabled, 2 pixels each in the left

and right edges of each line are cropped from the output.

•

Support for generating output to range from 16-bits to 8-bits wide (8-bits wide allows for 50% saving in

storage area).

•

Support for down sampling via programmable culling patterns.

Ability to control output to the DDR2 via an external write enable signal.

Support for up to 32K pixels (image size) in both the horizontal and vertical direction.

5.9.1.2 IPIPE - Image Pipe

The hardware Image Pipe (IPIPE) is a programmable hardware image processing module that is

responsible for transforming raw (unprocessed) image/video data from a sensor (CMOS or CCD) into

YCbCr 422 data that is amenable for compression or display. The IPIPE can also be configured to operate

in a resize only mode, which allows YCbCr 422 to be resized without applying the processing of every

module in the IPIPE. Typically, the output of the IPIPE is used for both video compression and displaying

it on an external display device such as a NTSC/PAL analog encoder or a digital LCD. The IPIPE is

programmed via control and parameter registers. The following features are supported by the IPIPE.

•

The input interface extracts valid raw data from the CCD raw data, and then various modules in IPIPE

process the raw CCD data.

•

The 2D noise filter module reduces impulse noise in the raw data and adjusts the resolution of the

input image.

•

The 2D pre-filter adjusts the resolution of the input image and remove line crawl noise.

The white balance module applies two gain adjustments to the data: a digital gain (total gain) and a

white balance gain.

•

The Color Filter Array (CFA) interpolation module implements CFA interpolation. The output from the

CFA interpolation module is always RGB formatted data.

The RGB2RGB blending module applies a 3x3 matrix transform to the RGB data generated by the

CFA interpolation module.

The gamma correction module independently applies gamma correction to each RGB component.

Gamma is implemented using a piece-wise linear interpolation approach with a 512 entry look up table

for each color.

•

The RGB2YCbCr conversion module applies 3x3 matrix transformation to the RGB data to convert it to

YCbCr data. This module also implements offset.

The 4:2:2 conversion module applies the chroma low pass filter and down samples Cb and Cr, so that

IPIPE output data is in YCbCr-4:2:2 format.

The 2D edge enhancer module improves image clarity with luminance non-linear filter. This module

also has contrast and brightness adjustment functions.

The chroma suppression module reduces faulty-color using luminance (Y) value or high-pass-filtering Y

value. The H-resizer and V-resizer modules resize horizontal and vertical image sizes, respectively.

The output interface module transfers data from IPIPE to SDRAM, in the form of YCbCr-422 or RGB

(32bit/16bit).

•

The histogram function can record histograms of up to 4 distinct areas into up to 256 bins.

IPIPE has three different processing paths:

–

Case 1: The CCD raw data directly leads to IPIPE and stores the YCbCr (or RGB) data to SDRAM.

Case 2: IPIPE reads CCD raw data and stores the Bayer pattern data after white balance to

SDRAM.

–

Case 3: IPIPE reads YCbCr-422 data and apply edge enhance, chroma suppression and Resize to

output YCbCr (or RGB) data to SDRAM.

116

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.9.1.3 Hardware 3A (H3A)

The H3A module is designed to support the control loops for Auto Focus, Auto White Balance and Auto

Exposure by collecting metrics about the imaging/video data. The metrics are to adjust the various

parameters for processing the imaging/video data. There are 2 main blocks in the H3A module:

•

Auto Focus (AF) engine

Auto Exposure (AE) Auto White Balance (AWB) engine

The AF engine extracts and filters the red, green, and blue data from the input image/video data and

provides either the accumulation or peaks of the data in a specified region. The specified region is a

two-dimensional block of data and is referred to as a "paxel" for the case of AF.

The AE/AWB Engine accumulates the values and checks for saturated values in a sub sampling of the

video data. In the case of the AE/AWB, the two-dimensional block of data is referred to as a "window".

Thus, other than referring them by different names, a paxel and a window are essentially the same thing.

However, the number, dimensions, and starting position of the AF paxels and the AE/AWB windows are

separately programmable.

The following features are supported by the AF engine:

•

Support for input from DDR2 / mDDR SDRAM (in addition to the CCDC port)

Support for a Peak Mode in a Paxel (a Paxel is defined as a two dimensional block of pixels).

Accumulate the maximum Focus Value of each line in a Paxel

Support for an Accumulation/Sum Mode (instead of Peak mode).

Accumulate Focus Value in a Paxel.

Support for up to 36 Paxels in the horizontal direction and up to 128 Paxels in the vertical direction.

The number of horizontal paxels is limited by the memory size (and cost), while the vertical number of

paxels is not. Therefore, the number of paxels in horizontal direction is smaller than the number of

paxels in vertical direction.

•

Programmable width and height for the Paxel. All paxels in the frame will be of same size.

Programmable red, green, and blue position within a 2x2 matrix.

Separate horizontal start for paxel and filtering.

Programmable vertical line increments within a paxel.

Parallel IIR filters configured in a dual-biquad configuration with individual coefficients (2 filters with 11

coefficients each). The filters are intended to compute the sharpness/peaks in the frame to focus on.

The following features are supported by the AE/AWB engine:

•

Support for input from DDR2 / mDDR SDRAM (in addition to the CCDC port)

Accumulate clipped pixels along with all non-saturated pixels

Support for up to 36 horizontal windows.

Support for up to 128 vertical windows.

Programmable width and height for the windows. All windows in the frame will be of same size.

Separate vertical start co-ordinate and height for a black row of paxels that is different than the

remaining color paxels.

•

Programmable Horizontal Sampling Points in a window

Programmable Vertical Sampling Points in a window

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.9.1.4 VPFE Electrical Data/Timing

Table 5-17. Timing Requirements for VPFE PCLK Master/Slave Mode (see Figure 5-23)

DM355-216

MIN

DM355-270

MIN

NO.

UNIT

MAX

t_c(PCLK)

t_w(PCLKH)

t_w(PCLKL)

t_t(PCLK)

Cycle time, PCLK⁽¹⁾

18.52

5.7

100

14.81

5.7

100

Pulse duration, PCLK high

Pulse duration, PCLK low

Transition time, PCLK

5.7

(1) The PCLK frequency must be less than or equal to half the VPSS clock frequency—i.e., PCLK ≤ SYSCLK4/2.

PCLK

Figure 5-23. VPFE PCLK Timing

Table 5-18. Timing Requirements for VPFE (CCD) Slave Mode (see Figure 5-24)

DM355

NO.

UNIT

MIN

MAX

t_{su(CCDV-PCLK)}

t_h(PCLK-CCDV)

t_su(HDV-PCLK)

t_h(PCLK-HDV)

Setup time, CCD valid before PCLK edge

Hold time, CCD valid after PCLK edge

Setup time, HD valid before PCLK edge

Hold time, HD valid after PCLK edge

Setup time, VD valid before PCLK edge

Hold time, VD valid after PCLK edge

Setup time, C_WE valid before PCLK edge

Hold time, C_WE valid after PCLK edge

t_su(VDV-PCLK)

t_h(PCLK-VDV)

t_{su(C_WEV-PCLK)}

t_{h(PCLK-C_WEV)}

t_{su(C_FIELDV-PCLK)}Setup time, C_FIELD valid before PCLK edge

t_{h(PCLK-C_FIELDV)}Hold time, C_FIELD valid after PCLK edge

118

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

PCLK

(Positive Edge Clocking)

PCLK

(Negative Edge Clocking)

8, 10

7, 9

HD/VD

11, 13

12, 14

C_WE/C_FIELD

CI[7:0]/YI[7:0]/

CCD[13:0]

Figure 5-24. VPFE (CCD) Slave Mode Input Data Timing

Table 5-19. Timing Requirements for VPFE (CCD) Master Mode⁽¹⁾(see Figure 5-25)

DM355

MIN

NO.

UNIT

MAX

t_{su(CCDV-PCLK)}

t_h(PCLK-CCDV)

t_{su(CWEV-PCLK)}

t_h(PCLK-CWEV)

Setup time, CCD valid before PCLK edge

Hold time, CCD valid after PCLK edge

Setup time, C_WE valid before PCLK edge

Hold time, C_WE valid after PCLK edge

(1) The VPFE may be configured to operate in either positive or negative edge clocking mode. When in positive edge clocking mode the

rising edge of PCLK is referenced. When in negative edge clocking mode the falling edge of PCLK is referenced.

PCLK

(Positive Edge Clocking)

PCLK

(Positive Edge Clocking)

CI[7:0]/YI[7:0]/

CCD[13:0]

C_WE/C_FIELD

Figure 5-25. VPFE (CCD) Master Mode Input Data Timing

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 5-20. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for VPFE (CCD) Master

Mode (see Figure 5-26)

DM355

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

MAX

t_{d(PCLKL-HDIV)}

t_{d(PCLKL-VDIV)}

Delay time, PCLK edge to HD invalid

Delay time, PCLK edge to VD invalid

PCLK

(Negative Edge Clocking)

PCLK

(Positive Edge Clocking)

Figure 5-26. VPFE (CCD) Master Mode Control Output Data Timing

5.9.2 Video Processing Back-End (VPBE)

The Video Processing Back-End of VPBE module is comprised of the On Screen Display (OSD) module

and the Video Encoder / Digital LCD Controller (VENC/DLCD).

5.9.2.1 On-Screen Display (OSD)

The primary function of the OSD module is to gather and blend video data and display/bitmap data and

then pass it to the Video Encoder (VENC) in YCbCr format. The video and display data is read from

external DDR2/mDDR memory. The OSD is programmed via control and parameter registers. The

following are the primary features that are supported by the OSD.

•

Support for two video windows and two OSD bitmapped windows that can be displayed simultaneously

(VIDWIN0/VIDWIN1 and OSDWIN0/OSDWIN1).

•

Video windows supports YCbCr data in 422 format from external memory, with the ability to

interchange the order of the CbCr component in the 32-bit word

•

OSD bitmap windows support 1/2/4/8 bit width index data of color palette

In addition one OSD bitmap window at a time can be configured to one of the following:

–

YUV422 (same as video data)

RGB format data in 16-bit mode (R=5bit, G=6bit, B=5bit)

24-bit mode (each R/G/B=8bit) with pixel level blending with video windows

•

Programmable color palette with the ability to select between a RAM/ROM table with support for 256

colors.

•

Support for 2 ROM tables, one of which can be selected at a given time

Separate enable/disable control for each window

Programmable width, height, and base starting coordinates for each window

External memory address and offset registers for each window

Support for x2 and x4 zoom in both the horizontal and vertical direction

Pixel-level blending/transparency/blinking attributes can be defined for OSDWIN0 when OSDWIN1 is

configured as an attribute window for OSDWIN0.

•

Support for blinking intervals to the attribute window

Ability to select either field/frame mode for the windows (interlaced/progressive)

An eight step blending process between the bitmap and video windows

Transparency support for the bitmap and video data (when a bitmap pixel is zero, there will be no

120

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

blending for that corresponding video pixel)

•

Ability to resize from VGA to NTSC/PAL (640x480 to 720x576) for both the OSD and video windows

Horizontal rescaling x1.5 is supported

Support for a rectangular cursor window and a programmable background color selection.

The width, height, and color of the cursor is selectable

The display priority is: Rectangular-Cursor > OSDWIN1 > OSDWIN0 > VIDWIN1 > VIDWIN0 >

background color

•

Support for attenuation of the YCbCr values for the REC601 standard.

The following restrictions exist in the OSD module.

•

If the vertical resize filter is enabled for either of the video windows, the maximum horizontal window

dimension cannot be greater than 720 currently. This is due to the limitation in the size of the line

memory.

•

It is not possible to use both of the CLUT ROMs at the same time. However, a window can use RAM

while another uses ROM.

5.9.2.2 Video Encoder / Digital LCD Controller (VENC/DLCD)

The VENC/DLCD consists of three major blocks; a) the video encoder that generates analog video output,

b) the digital LCD controller that generates digital RGB/YCbCr data output and timing signals, and c) the

timing generator.

The video encoder for analog video supports the following features:

•

Master Clock Input - 27 MHz (x2 Upsampling)

Programmable Timing Generator

SDTV Support

–

Composite NTSC-M, PAL-B/D/G/H/I

Non-Interlace option

CGMS/WSS

Line 21 Closed Caption Data Encoding

Chroma Low Pass Filter 1.5MHz/3MHz

Programmable SC-H phase

•

10-bit Over-Sampling D/A Converter (27MHz)

Internal analog video buffer

Optional 7.5% Pedestal

16-235/0-255 Input Amplitude Selectable

Programmable Luma Delay

Master/Slave Operation

Internal Color Bar Generation (75%)

The digital LCD controller supports the following features:

•

Programmable DCLK

Programmable Timing Generator

Various Output Format

–

YCbCr 16bit

YCbCr 8bit

ITU-R BT. 656

Parallel RGB 16-bit/18-bit

Serial 8-bit RGB

•

Low Pass Filter for Digital RGB Output

Master/Slave Operation

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

•

Internal Color Bar Generation (100%/75%)

YUV/RGB modes support HDTV output (720p/1080i) with 74.25 MHz external clock input

5.9.2.3 VPBE Electrical Data/Timing

Table 5-21. Timing Requirements for VPBE CLK Inputs (see Figure 5-27)

DM355

MIN

NO.

UNIT

MAX

160

t_c(PCLK)

Cycle time, PCLK⁽¹⁾

13.33

5.7

t_w(PCLKH)

t_w(PCLKL)

t_t(PCLK)

Pulse duration, PCLK high

Pulse duration, PCLK low

Transition time, PCLK

5.7

t_c(EXTCLK)

t_w(EXTCLKH)

t_w(EXTCLKL)

t_t(EXTCLK)

Cycle time, EXTCLK

13.33

5.7

160

Pulse duration, EXTCLK high

Pulse duration, EXTCLK low

Transition time, EXTCLK

5.7

(1) When the CCDC is used, the PCLK frequency must be less than or equal to half the VPSS clock frequency—i.e., PCLK ≤ SYSCLK4/2.

PCLK

EXTCLK

Figure 5-27. VPBE PCLK and EXTCLK Timing

Table 5-22. Timing Requirements for VPBE Control Input With Respect to PCLK and EXTCLK^(1)(2)(3)(see

Figure 5-28)

DM355

NO.

UNIT

MIN

MAX

t_{su(VCTLV-VCLKIN)}

t_{h(VCLKIN-VCTLV)}

Setup time, VCTL valid before VCLKIN edge

Hold time, VCTL valid after VCLKIN edge

(1) The VPBE may be configured to operate in either positive or negative edge clocking mode. When in positive edge clocking mode, the

rising edge of VCLKIN is referenced. When in negative edge clocking mode, the falling edge of VCLKIN is referenced.

(2) VCTL = HSYNC, VSYNC, and FIELD

(3) VCLKIN = PCLK or EXTCLK

122

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

(A)

VCLKIN

(Positive Edge Clocking)

(A)

VCLKIN

(Negative Edge Clocking)

(B)

VCTL

A. VCLKIN = PCLK or EXTCLK

B. VCTL = HSYNC, VSYNC, and FIELD

Figure 5-28. VPBE Input Timing With Respect to PCLK and EXTCLK

Table 5-23. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for VPBE Control and

Data Output With Respect to PCLK and EXTCLK^(1)(2)(3)(see Figure 5-29)

DM355

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

MAX

t_{d(VCLKIN-VCTLV)}

t_{d(VCLKIN-VCTLIV)}

t_{d(VCLKIN-VDATAV)}

Delay time, VCLKIN edge to VCTL valid

Delay time, VCLKIN edge to VCTL invalid

Delay time, VCLKIN edge to VDATA valid

13.3

t_{d(VCLKIN-VDATAIV)}Delay time, VCLKIN edge to VDATA invalid

(1) The VPBE may be configured to operate in either positive or negative edge clocking mode. When in positive edge clocking mode, the

rising edge of VCLKIN is referenced. When in negative edge clocking mode, the falling edge of VCLKIN is referenced.

(2) VCLKIN = PCLK or EXTCLK

(3) VCTL = HSYNC, VSYNC, FIELD, and LCD_OE

(A)

VCLKIN

(Positive Edge Clocking)

(A)

VCLKIN

(Negative Edge Clocking)

(B)

VCTL

(C)

VDATA

A. VCLKIN = PCLK or EXTCLK

B. VCTL = HSYNC, VSYNC, FIELD, and LCD_OE

C. VDATA = COUT[7:0], YOUT[7:0], R[7:3], G[7:2], and B[7:3]

Figure 5-29. VPBE Control and Data Output With Respect to PCLK and EXTCLK

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 5-24. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for VPBE Control and

Data Output With Respect to VCLK⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾(see Figure 5-30)

DM355

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

13.33

5.7

MAX

t_c(VCLK)

Cycle time, VCLK

160

t_w(VCLKH)

Pulse duration, VCLK high

t_w(VCLKL)

Pulse duration, VCLK low

5.7

t_t(VCLK)

Transition time, VCLK

t_{d(VCLKINH-VCLKH)}

t_{d(VCLKINL-VCLKL)}

t_{d(VCLK-VCTLV)}

t_{d(VCLK-VCTLIV)}

t_{d(VCLK-VDATAV)}

t_{d(VCLK-VDATAIV)}

Delay time, VCLKIN high to VCLK high

Delay time, VCLKIN low to VCLK low

Delay time, VCLK edge to VCTL valid

Delay time, VCLK edge to VCTL invalid

Delay time, VCLK edge to VDATA valid

Delay time, VCLK edge to VDATA invalid

(1) The VPBE may be configured to operate in either positive or negative edge clocking mode. When in positive edge clocking mode, the

rising edge of VCLK is referenced. When in negative edge clocking mode, the falling edge of VCLK is referenced.

(2) VCLKIN = PCLK or EXTCLK. Note that if the CCDC is used, the PCLK frequency must be less than or equal to half the VPSS clock

frequency—i.e., PCLK ≤ SYSCLK4/2.

(A)

VCLKIN

VCLK

(Positive Edge

Clocking)

VCLK

(Negative Edge

Clocking)

(B)

VCTL

(C)

VDATA

A. VCLKIN = PCLK or EXTCLK

B. VCTL = HSYNC, VSYNC, FIELD, and LCD_OE

C. VDATA = COUT[7:0], YOUT[7:0], R[7:3], G[7:2], and B[7:3]

Figure 5-30. VPBE Control and Data Output Timing With Respect to VCLK

5.9.2.4 DAC and Video Buffer Electrical Data/Timing

The DAC and video buffer can be configured in a DAC only configuration or in a DAC and video buffer

configuration. In the DAC only configuration the internal video buffer is not used and an external video

buffer is attached to the DAC. In the DAC and video buffer configuration, the DAC and internal video

buffer are both used and a TV cable may be attached directly to the output of the video buffer. See

Figure 5-31 and Figure 5-32 for recommenced circuits for each configuration.

124

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

ideo DAC

Buffer

VREF

IBIAS

IOUT

VFB

TVOUT

0.1 mF

BIAS

2550W

RLOAD

499W

DAC Digital Input

DAC Output Current

DIN <9:0>

MSB

Iout [mA]

1.4 mA

LSB

Example for External Circuit

A. Connect IOUT to a high-impedance video buffer device.

B. Place capacitors and resistors as close as possible to the DM355.

C. Configure the VDAC_CONFIG register in the system control module as follows: DINV = 0, PWD_GBZ = 1,

PWD_VBUFZ 0, ACCUP_EN X. See theTMS320DM355 ARM Subsystem Reference Guide and the

TMS320DM355 DMSoC Video Processing Back End (VPBE) User’s Guide for more information on VDAC_CONFIG.

Figure 5-31. DAC Only Application Example

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Video DAC and Buffer

IBIAS

VREF

IOUT

VFB

TVOUT

TV monitor

0.1 mF

BIAS

2550 Ω

= 1000 Ω

out

= 1070 Ω

DAC Digital Input

Video Buffer Output Voltage

TVOUT [V]

DIN <9:0>

MSB

V_OH(VIDBUF)

V_OL(VIDBUF)

LSB

A. Place capacitors and resistors as close as possible to the DM355.

B. You must use the circuit shown in this diagram. Also you must configure the VDAC_CONFIG register in the System

Control module as follows: TRESB4R4 = 0x3, TRESB4R2 = 0x8, TRESB4R1 = 0x8, TRIMBITS = 0x34, PWD_BGZ =

1 (power up VREF), SPEED = 1 (faster), TVINT = don't care, PWD_VBUFZ = 1 (power up video buffer), VREFSET =

don't care, ACCUP_EN = 0 (no A/C coupling), DINV = 1 (invert). See the TMS320DM355 ARM Subsystem Reference

Guide and the TMS320DM355 DMSoC Video Processing Back End (VPBE) User's Guide for more information on the

VDAC_CONFIG register and Video Buffer.

C. For proper TVOUT voltage, you must connect the pin TVOUT directly to the TV. No A/C coupling capacitor or

termination resistor is necessary on your DM355 board. Also, it is assumed that the TV has no internal A/C coupling

capacitor but does have an internal termination resistor, as shown in this diagram. TVOUT voltage will range from

V_OL(VIDBUF)to V_OH(VIDBUF). See Section 4.3 for the voltage specifications.

Figure 5-32. DAC With Buffer Circuit

126

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.10 USB 2.0

DM355 includes a USB Controller Module that is built around the Mentor USB Multi-Point High-Speed

Dual Role Controller, endpoint memory, CPPI DMA controller and UTMI+ PHY. The controller conforms to

USB 2.0 Specification. The USB2.0 peripheral supports the following features:

•

USB 2.0 peripheral at speeds high speed (HS: 480 Mb/s) and full speed (FS: 12 Mb/s)

USB 2.0 host at speeds HS, FS, and low speed (LS: 1.5 Mb/s)

All transfer modes (control, bulk, interrupt, and isochronous)

Four Transmit (TX) and four Receive (RX) endpoints in addition to endpoint 0

FIFO RAM

–

4K endpoint

Programmable FIFO size

•

Connects to a standard UTMI+ PHY with a 60 MHz, 8-bit interface

Includes a DMA sub-module that supports four TX and four RX channels of CPPI 3.0 DMAs

RNDIS mode for accelerating RNDIS type protocols using short packet termination over USB

USB OTG extensions, i.e. session request protocol (SRP) and host negotiation protocol (HNP)

The USB2.0 peripheral does not support the following features:

•

On-chip charge pump

High bandwidth ISO mode is not supported (triple buffering)

16-bit 30 MHz UTMI+ interface is not supported

RNDIS mode acceleration for USB sizes that are not multiples of 64 bytes

Endpoint max USB packet sizes that do not conform to the USB 2.0 spec (for FS/LS: 8, 16, 32, 64,

and 1023 are defined; for HS: 64, 128, 512, and 1024 are defined)

5.10.1 USB2.0 Electrical Data/Timing

Table 5-25. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for USB2.0 (see

Figure 5-33)

DM355

LOW SPEED

1.5 Mbps

FULL SPEED

12 Mbps

HIGH SPEED⁽¹⁾

480 Mbps

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

0.5

MAX

t_r(D)

Rise time, USB_DP and USB_DM signals⁽²⁾

Fall time, USB_DP and USB_DM signals⁽²⁾

Rise/Fall time, matching⁽³⁾

Output signal cross-over voltage⁽²⁾

Source (Host) Driver jitter, next transition

Function Driver jitter, next transition

Source (Host) Driver jitter, paired transition⁽⁴⁾

Function Driver jitter, paired transition

Pulse duration, EOP transmitter

Pulse duration, EOP receiver

300

125

t_f(D)

0.5

t_frfm

90 111.11

V_CRS

1.3

t_jr(source)NT

t_jr(FUNC)NT

t_jr(source)PT

t_jr(FUNC)PT

t_w(EOPT)

t_w(EOPR)

t_(DRATE)

1250

670

1500

160

175

Data Rate

1.5

–

480 Mb/s

49.5

10 Z_DRV

Driver Output Resistance

–

49.5

40.5

Ω

(1) For more detailed specification information, see the Universal Serial Bus Specification Revision 2.0, Chapter 7. Electrical.

(2) Low Speed: C_L= 200 pF, Full Speed: C_L= 50 pF, High Speed: C_L= 50 pF

(3) t_frfm= (t_r/t_f) x 100. [Excluding the first transaction from the Idle state.]

(4) t_jr= t_px(1)- t_px(0)

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

per − jr

USB_DM

90% V

CRS

10% V

USB_DP

Figure 5-33. USB2.0 Integrated Transceiver Interface Timing

USB

V_{SS_USB_REF}

USB_R1

10 K W 1%

Figure 5-34. USB Reference Resistor Routing

128

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.11 Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)

The contains 3 separate UART modules (1 with hardware flow control). These modules performs

serial-to-parallel conversion on data received from a peripheral device or modem, and parallel-to-serial

conversion on data received from the CPU. Each UART also includes a programmable baud rate

generator capable of dividing the 24MHz reference clock by divisors from 1 to 65,535 to produce a 16 x

clock driving the internal logic. The UART modules support the following features:

•

Frequency pre-scale values from 1 to 65,535 to generate appropriate baud rates

16-byte storage space for both the transmitter and receiver FIFOs

Unique interrupts, one for each UART

Unique EDMA events, both received and transmitted data for each UART

1, 4, 8, or 14 byte selectable receiver FIFO trigger level for autoflow control and DMA

Programmable auto-rts and auto-cts for autoflow control (supported on UART2)

Programmable serial data formats

–

5, 6, 7, or 8-bit characters

Even, odd, or no parity bit generation and detection

1, 1.5, or 2 stop bit generation

•

False start bit detection

Line break generation and detection

Internal diagnostic capabilities

–

Loopback controls for communications link fault isolation

Break, parity, overrun, and framing error simulation

•

Modem control functions: CTS, RTS (supported on UART2)

5.11.1 UART Electrical Data/Timing

Table 5-26. Timing Requirements for UARTx Receive (see Figure 5-35)

DM355

NO.

UNIT

MIN

MAX

1.05U⁽¹⁾

t_w(URXDB)

t_w(URXSB)

Pulse duration, receive data bit (RXDn)

Pulse duration, receive start bit

0.99U⁽¹⁾

(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.

Table 5-27. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for UARTx Transmit

(see Figure 5-35)

DM355

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

MAX

UART0/1 Maximum programmable baud rate

UART2 Maximum programmable baud rate

Pulse duration, transmit data bit (TXDn)

Pulse duration, transmit start bit

1.5

f_(baud)

MHz

t_w(UTXDB)

t_w(UTXSB)

U - 2⁽¹⁾

U + 2⁽¹⁾

(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Start

Bit

UART_TXDn

Data Bits

Start

Bit

UART_RXDn

Data Bits

Figure 5-35. UART Transmit/Receive Timing

130

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.12 Serial Port Interface (SPI)

The contains 3 separate SPI modules. These modules provide a programmable length shift register which

allows serial communication with other SPI devices through a 3 or 4 wire interface (Clock, Data In, Data

Out, and Enable). The SPI supports the following features:

•

Master mode operation

2 chip selects for interfacing to multiple slave SPI devices.

3 or 4 wire interface (Clock, Data In, Data Out, and Enable)

Unique interrupt for each SPI port

Separate DMA events for SPI Receive and Transmit

16-bit shift register

Receive buffer register

Programmable character length (2 to 16 bits)

Programmable SPI clock frequency range

8-bit clock prescaler

Programmable clock phase (delay or no delay)

Programmable clock polarity

The SPI modules do not support the following features:

•

Slave mode. Only Master mode is supported in DM355 (Master mode means that DM355 provides the

serial clock).

•

GPIO mode. GPIO functionality is supported by the GIO modules for those SPI pins that are

multiplexed with GPIO signals.

5.12.1 SPI Electrical Data/Timing

Table 5-28. Timing Requirements for SPI (All Modes)⁽¹⁾(see Figure 5-36)

DM355

MIN

NO.

UNIT

MAX

t_c(CLK)

Cycle time, SPI_CLK

37.037 ns

t_w(CLKH)

t_w(CLKL)

Pulse duration, SPI_CLK high (All Master Modes)

Pulse duration, SPI_CLK low (All Master Modes

0.45*T

0.55*T

(1) T = t_c(CLK)= SPI_CLK period is equal to the SPI module clock divided by a configurable divider.

SPIx_CLK

(Clock Polarity = 0)

SPIx_CLK

(Clock Polarity = 1)

Figure 5-36. SPI_CLK Timing

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

SPI Master Mode Timings (Clock Phase = 0)

Table 5-29. Timing Requirements for SPI Master Mode [Clock Phase = 0] ⁽¹⁾(see Figure 5-37)

DM355

NO.

UNIT

MIN

MAX

Setup time, SPI_DI (input) valid before SPI_CLK (output)

falling edge

t_su(DIV-CLKL)

t_su(DIV-CLKH)

t_h(CLKL-DIV)

t_h(CLKH-DIV)

Clock Polarity = 0

Clock Polarity = 1

Clock Polarity = 0

Clock Polarity = 1

.5P + 3

Setup time, SPI_DI (in put) valid before SPI_CLK (output)

rising edge

.5P + 3

Hold time, SPI_DI (input) valid after SPI_CLK (output) falling

edge

Hold time, SPI_DI (input) valid after SPI_CLK (output) rising

edge

2.5P + 3

(1) P = Period of the SPI module clock in nanoseconds (P = PLL1/6).

Table 5-30. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for SPI Master Mode

[Clock Phase = 0] (see Figure 5-37)

DM355

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

MAX

Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) rising edge to SPI_DO

(output) transition

t_d(CLKH-DOV)

t_d(CLKL-DOV)

t_{d(ENL-CLKH/L)}

Clock Polarity = 0

Clock Polarity = 1

-4

Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) falling edge to SPI_DO

(output) transition

-4

Delay time, SPI_EN[1:0] (output) falling edge to first SPI_CLK (output) rising or falling

edge

(1)

2P⁽¹⁾

P+.5C⁽²

(2)

t_{d(CLKH/L-ENH)}Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) rising or falling edge to SPI_EN[1:0] (output) rising edge

)

(1) The delay time can be adjusted using the SPI module register C2TDELAY. See the TMS320DM355 DMSoC Serial Peripheral Interface

(SPI) User's Guide (SPRUED4).

(2) The delay time can be adjusted using the SPI module register T2CDELAY. See the TMS320DM355 DMSoC Serial Peripheral Interface

(SPI) User's Guide (SPRUED4).

SPI_EN

SPI_CLK

(Clock Polarity = 0)

SPI_CLK

(Clock Polarity = 1)

SPI_DI

(Input)

MSB IN

DATA

LSB IN

SPI_DO

(Output)

MSB OUT

DATA

LSB OUT

Figure 5-37. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0)

132

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

SPI Master Mode Timings (Clock Phase = 1)

Table 5-31. Timing Requirements for SPI Master Mode [Clock Phase = 1] (see Figure 5-38)

DM355

NO.

UNIT

MIN

MAX

Setup time, SPI_DI (input) valid before SPI_CLK (output)

rising edge

t_su(DIV-CLKL)

t_su(DIV-CLKH)

t_h(CLKL-DIV)

t_h(CLKH-DIV)

Clock Polarity = 0

Clock Polarity = 1

Clock Polarity = 0

Clock Polarity = 1

.5P + 3

Setup time, SPI_DI (in put) valid before SPI_CLK (output)

falling edge

.5P + 3

Hold time, SPI_DI (input) valid after SPI_CLK (output) rising

edge

Hold time, SPI_DI (input) valid after SPI_CLK (output) falling

edge

Table 5-32. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for SPI Master Mode

[Clock Phase = 1] (see Figure 5-38)

DM355

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

MAX

Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) falling edge to SPI_DO

(output) transition

t_d(CLKL-DOV)

t_d(CLKH-DOV)

t_{d(ENL-CLKH/L)}

Clock Polarity = 0

Clock Polarity = 1

-4

Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) rising edge to SPI_DO

(output) transition

-4

Delay time, SPI_EN[1:0] (output) falling edge to first SPI_CLK (output) rising or falling

edge

2P+.5C

(1)

(2)

(1)

t_{d(CLKL/H-DOHz)}Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) falling or rising edge to SPI_DO (output) high impedance

P⁽²⁾

(1) The delay time can be adjusted using the SPI module register C2TDELAY. See the TMS320DM355 DMSoC Serial Peripheral Interface

(SPI) User's Guide (SPRUED4).

(2) The delay time can be adjusted using the SPI module register T2CDELAY. See the TMS320DM355 DMSoC Serial Peripheral Interface

(SPI) User's Guide (SPRUED4).

SPI_EN

SPI_CLK

(Clock Polarity = 0)

SPI_CLK

(Clock Polarity = 1)

SPI_DI

(Input)

MSB IN

DATA

LSB IN

SPI_DO

(Output)

MSB OUT

LSB OUT

Figure 5-38. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1)

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.13 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)

The inter-integrated circuit (I2C) module provides an interface between and other devices compliant with

Philips Semiconductors Inter-IC bus (I²C-bus) specification version 2.1 and connected by way of an

I²C-bus. External components attached to this 2-wire serial bus can transmit/receive up to 8-bit data

to/from the DM355 through the I2C module.

The I2C port supports:

•

Compatible with Philips I2C Specification Revision 2.1 (January 2000)

Fast Mode up to 400 Kbps (no fail-safe I/O buffers)

Noise Filter to Remove Noise 50 ns or less

Seven- and Ten-Bit Device Addressing Modes

Master (Transmit/Receive) and Slave (Transmit/Receive) Functionality

Events: DMA, Interrupt, or Polling

Slew-Rate Limited Open-Drain Output Buffers

For more detailed information on the I2C peripheral, see the Documentation Support section for the

Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Module Reference Guide.

134

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.13.1 I2C Electrical Data/Timing

5.13.1.1 Inter-Integrated Circuits (I2C) Timing

Table 5-33. Timing Requirements for I2C Timings⁽¹⁾(see Figure 5-39)

DM355

STANDARD

MODE

NO.

FAST MODE

UNIT

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

t_c(SCL)

Cycle time, SCL

2.5

μs

Setup time, SCL high before SDA low (for a repeated START

condition)

t_{su(SCLH-SDAL)}

4.7

0.6

μs

Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a START and a repeated

START condition)

t_h(SCLL-SDAL)

μs

t_w(SCLL)

Pulse duration, SCL low

4.7

1.3

0.6

100⁽²⁾

μs

t_w(SCLH)

Pulse duration, SCL high

t_{su(SDAV-SCLH)}

t_h(SDA-SCLL)

Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high

Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low (For I²C bus™ devices)

250

0⁽³⁾

0⁽³⁾0.9⁽⁴⁾

Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START

conditions

t_w(SDAH)

4.7

1.3

μs

(5)

t_r(SDA)

Rise time, SDA

1000 20 + 0.1C_b

300 20 + 0.1C_b

300

μs

(5)

t_r(SCL)

Rise time, SCL

t_f(SDA)

Fall time, SDA

t_f(SCL)

Fall time, SCL

t_{su(SCLH-SDAH)}

t_w(SP)

Setup time, SCL high before SDA high (for STOP condition)

Pulse duration, spike (must be suppressed)

Capacitive load for each bus line

0.6

(5)

C_b

400

(1) The I2C pins SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pins could potentially draw current when the device is powered

down.

(2) A Fast-mode I²C-bus™ device can be used in a Standard-mode I²C-bus™ system, but the requirement t_su(SDA-SCLH)≥ 250 ns must then

be met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch

the LOW period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line t_rmax + t_su(SDA-SCLH)= 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns

(according to the Standard-mode I²C-Bus Specification) before the SCL line is released.

(3) A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal (referred to the V_IHminof the SCL signal) to bridge the

undefined region of the falling edge of SCL.

(4) The maximum t_h(SDA-SCLL)has only to be met if the device does not stretch the low period [t_w(SCLL)] of the SCL signal.

(5) C_b= total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.

SDA

SCL

Stop

Start

Repeated

Start

Stop

Figure 5-39. I2C Receive Timings

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 5-34. Switching Characteristics for I2C Timings⁽¹⁾(see Figure 5-40)

DM355

STANDARD

MODE

NO.

PARAMETER

FAST MODE

UNIT

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

t_c(SCL)

Cycle time, SCL

2.5

μs

Delay time, SCL high to SDA low (for a repeated START

condition)

t_d(SCLH-SDAL)

4.7

0.6

μs

Delay time, SDA low to SCL low (for a START and a repeated

START condition)

t_d(SDAL-SCLL)

μs

t_w(SCLL)

Pulse duration, SCL low

4.7

1.3

0.6

100

μs

t_w(SCLH)

Pulse duration, SCL high

t_d(SDAV-SCLH)

t_v(SCLL-SDAV)

Delay time, SDA valid to SCL high

Valid time, SDA valid after SCL low (For I2C devices)

250

0.9

Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START

conditions

t_w(SDAH)

4.7

1.3

0.6

μs

t_d(SCLH-SDAH)

C_p

Delay time, SCL high to SDA high (for STOP condition)

Capacitance for each I2C pin

μs

(1) C_b= total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.

CAUTION

The DM355 I²C pins use a standard ±4-mA LVCMOS buffer, not the slow I/OP buffer

defined in the I²C specification. Series resistors may be necessary to reduce noise at

the system level.

SDA

SCL

Stop

Start

Repeated

Start

Stop

Figure 5-40. I2C Transmit Timings

136

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.14 Audio Serial Port (ASP)

DM355 includes two separate ASP controllers. The primary use for the audio serial port (ASP) is for audio

interface purposes. The primary audio modes that are supported by the ASP are the AC97 and IIS modes.

In addition to the primary audio modes, the ASP supports general serial port receive and transmit

operation, but is not intended to be used as a high-speed interface. The ASP is backward compatible with

other TI ASPs. The ASP supports the following features:

•

Full-duplex communication

Double-buffered data registers, which allow a continuous data stream

Independent framing and clocking for receive and transmit

External shift clock generation or an internal programmable frequency shift clock

Double-buffered data registers, which allow a continuous data stream

Independent framing and clocking for receive and transmit

Direct interface to industry-standard codecs, analog interface chips (AICs), and other serially

connected analog-to-digital (A/D) and digital-to-analog (D/A) devices

•

Direct interface to AC97 compliant devices (the necessary multiphase frame synchronization capability

is provided)

•

Direct interface to IIS compliant devices

A wide selection of data sizes, including 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 32 bits

μ-Law and A-Law commanding

8-bit data transfers with the option of LSB or MSB first

Programmable polarity for both frame synchronization and data clocks

Highly programmable internal clock and frame generation

For more detailed information on the ASP peripheral, see the Documentation Support section for the

Audio Serial Port (ASP) Reference Guide.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.14.1 ASP Electrical Data/Timing

5.14.1.1 Audio Serial Port (ASP) Timing

Table 5-35. Timing Requirements for ASP⁽¹⁾(see Figure 5-41)

DM355

NO.

UNIT

MIN

MAX

tc(CLK)

Cycle time, CLK

CLK ext

38.5 or 2P⁽²⁾⁽³⁾

19.25 or P^(2)(3)(4)

OTG(CLKS)

Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low

CLKS ext

CLKR int

CLKR ext

CLKR int

CLKR ext

CLKR int

CLKR ext

CLKR int

CLKR ext

CLKX int

CLKX ext

CLKX int

CLKX ext

t_su(FRH-CKRL)

t_h(CKRL-FRH)

t_su(DRV-CKRL)

t_h(CKRL-DRV)

t_su(FXH-CKXL)

t_h(CKXL-FXH)

Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low

Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low

Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low

Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low

Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low

Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low

(1) CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also

inverted.

(2) P = (1/SYSCLK2), where SYSCLK2 is an output clock of PLLC1 (see Section 3.5) .

(3) Use which ever value is greater.

(4) The ASP does not have a duty cycle specification, just ensure that the minimum pulse duration specification is met.

138

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 5-36. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for ASP⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾

(see Figure 5-41)

DM355

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

MAX

t_c(CKRX)

Cycle time, CLKR/X

CLKR/X int

CLKR int

CLKR ext

CLKX int

CLKX ext

CLKX int

CLKX ext

CLKX int

CLKX ext

FSX int

38.5 or 2P⁽³⁾⁽⁴⁾

td(CLKS-CLKRX) Delay time, CLKS high to internal CLKR/X

C - 1

C + 1

t_w(CKRX)

Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low

Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid

t_d(CKRH-FRV)

-4

t_d(CKXH-FXV)

Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX valid

tdis(CKXH-

DXHZ)

Disable time, DX high impedance following last data

bit from CLKX high

-5

t_d(CKXH-DXV)

Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid

14⁽⁵⁾

Delay time, FSX high to DX valid

ONLY applies when in data

delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode

t_d(FXH-DXV)

FSX ext

25⁽⁵⁾

(1) CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also

inverted.

(2) Minimum delay times also represent minimum output hold times.

(3) P = (1/SYSCLK2), where SYSCLK2 is an output clock of PLLC1 (see Section 3.5) .

(4) Use which ever value is greater.

(5) Extra delay from FSX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.

if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0

if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 4P, D2 = 8P

CLKS

CLKR

FSR (int)

FSR (ext)

Bit(n-1)

(n-2)

(n-3)

CLKX

FSX (int)

FSX (ext)

FSX

(XDATDLY=00b)

(A)

Bit(n-1)

Bit 0

(n-2)

(n-3)

A. Parameter No. 13 applies to the first data bitonly when XDATDLY ≠ 0.

Figure 5-41. ASP Timing

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 5-37. ASP as SPI Timing Requirements

CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0 (see Figure 5-42)

MASTER

NO.

UNIT

MIN

MAX

M30

M31

t_su(DRV-CKXL)

t_h(CKXL-DRV)

Setup time, DR valid before CLKX low

Hold time, DR valid after CLKX low

Table 5-38. ASP as SPI Switching Characteristics⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾

CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0 (see Figure 5-42)

MASTER

MIN

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MAX

38.5 or

M33

tc(CKX)

Cycle time, CLKX

2P⁽¹⁾⁽³⁾

T – 2

C – 2

–2

M24

M25

M26

M27

t_d(CKXL-FXH)

t_d(FXL-CKXH)

t_d(CKXH-DXV)

t_{dis(CKXL-DXHZ)}

Delay time, CLKX low to FSX high⁽²⁾

Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high⁽⁴⁾

T + 3

C + 2

Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid

Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from CLKX low

C – 3

C +3

(1) P = (1/SYSCLK2), where SYSCLK2 is an output clock of PLLC1 (see Section 3.5) .

(2) T = BCLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) × 2P

C = BCLKX low pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2) × 2P when CLKGDV is even

(3) Use which ever value is greater.

(4) FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master

clock (CLKX).

CLKX

M33

M24

M25

FSX

M27

M26

(n-2)

Bit 0

Bit(n-1)

(n-3)

(n-4)

M30

M31

(n-2)

Bit 0

(n-4)

Figure 5-42. ASP as SPI: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0

140

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 5-39. ASP as SPI Timing Requirements

CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0

MASTER

NO.

UNIT

MIN

MAX

M39

M40

t_su(DRV-CKXH)

t_h(CKXH-DRV)

Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high

Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high

Table 5-40. ASP as SPI Switching Characteristics⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾

CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0 (see Figure 5-43)

MASTER

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

MAX

38.5 or

2P⁽¹⁾⁽³⁾

M42

tc(CKX)

Cycle time, CLKX

M34

M35

M36

t_d(CKXL-FXH)

t_d(FXL-CKXH)

t_d(CKXL-DXV)

Delay time, CLKX low to FSX high⁽⁴⁾

Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high⁽⁵⁾

Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid

C – 2

T – 2

–2

C + 3

T + 2

Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from

CLKX low

M37

M38

t_{dis(CKXL-DXHZ)}

t_d(FXL-DXV)

–3

Delay time, FSX low to DX valid

D – 2

D + 10

(1) P = (1/SYSCLK2), where SYSCLK2 is an output clock of PLLC1 (see Section 3.5) .

(2) T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) × P

C = CLKX low pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2) × P when CLKGDV is even

D = CLKX high pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) × P when CLKGDV is even

(3) Use which ever value is greater.

(4) FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output.

CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master ASP

(5) FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master

clock (CLKX).

CLKX

M42

M35

M34

FSX

M37

M38

M39

M36

(n-2)

Bit 0

Bit(n-1)

(n-3)

(n-4)

M40

(n-2)

Bit 0

(n-4)

Figure 5-43. ASP as SPI: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 5-41. ASP as SPI Timing Requirements

CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 5-44)

MASTER

NO.

UNIT

MIN

MAX

M49

M50

t_su(DRV-CKXH)

t_h(CKXH-DRV)

Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high

Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high

Table 5-42. ASP as SPI Switching Characteristics⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾

CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 5-44)

MASTER

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

MAX

38.5 or

2P⁽¹⁾⁽³⁾

M52

tc(CKX)

Cycle time, CLKX

M43

M44

M45

t_d(CKXH-FXH)

t_d(FXL-CKXL)

t_d(CKXL-DXV)

Delay time, CLKX high to FSX high⁽⁴⁾

Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low⁽⁵⁾

Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid

T – 1

D – 2

–2

T + 3

D + 2

Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from

CLKX high

M46

t_{dis(CKXH-DXHZ)}

D – 3

D + 3

(1) P = (1/SYSCLK2), where SYSCLK2 is an output clock of PLLC1 (see Section 3.5) .

(2) T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) × P

C = CLKX low pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2) × P when CLKGDV is even

D = CLKX high pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) × P when CLKGDV is even

(3) Use which ever value is greater.

(4) FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output.

CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master ASP

(5) FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master

clock (CLKX).

CLKX

M43

FSX

M44

M52

M46

M45

(n-2)

Bit 0

Bit(n-1)

(n-3)

(n-4)

M49

M50

(n-2)

Bit 0

(n-3)

(n-4)

Figure 5-44. ASP as SPI: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1

142

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 5-43. ASP as SPI Timing Requirements

CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 5-45)

MASTER

UNIT

NO.

MIN

MAX

M58

M59

t_su(DRV-CKXL)

t_h(CKXL-DRV)

Setup time, DR valid before CLKX low

Hold time, DR valid after CLKX low

Table 5-44. ASP as SPI Switching Characteristics⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾

CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 5-45)

MASTER

MIN

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MAX

38.5 or

M62

tc(CKX)

Cycle time, CLKX

2P⁽³⁾⁽³⁾

D – 1

T – 2

–2

M53

M54

M55

t_d(CKXH-FXH)

t_d(FXL-CKXL)

t_d(CKXL-DXV)

Delay time, CLKX high to FSX high⁽⁴⁾

Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low⁽⁵⁾

Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid

D + 3

T + 2

Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from

CLKX high

M56

M57

t_{dis(CKXH-DXHZ)}

t_d(FXL-DXV)

– 3

+ 3

Delay time, FSX low to DX valid

C – 1

C + 10

(1) P = (1/SYSCLK2), where SYSCLK2 is an output clock of PLLC1 (see Section 3.5) .

(2) T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) × P

C = CLKX low pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2) × P when CLKGDV is even

D = CLKX high pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) × P when CLKGDV is even

(3) Use which ever value is greater.

(4) FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output.

CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master ASP

(5) FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master

clock (CLKX).

CLKX

M62

M53

M54

FSX

M57

M56

M55

(n-2)

Bit 0

Bit(n-1)

(n-3)

(n-4)

M58

M59

(n-2)

Bit 0

(n-3)

(n-4)

Figure 5-45. ASP as SPI: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.15 Timer

The contains four software-programmable timers. Timer 0, Timer 1, and Timer 3 (general-purpose timers)

can be programmed in 64-bit mode, dual 32-bit unchained mode, or dual 32-bit chained mode. Timer 3

supports additional features over the other timers: external clock/event input, period reload, output event

tied to Real Time Out (RTO) module, external event capture, and timer counter register read reset. Timer

2 is used only as a watchdog timer. Timer 2 is tied to device reset.

•

64-bit count-up counter

Timer modes:

–

64-bit general-purpose timer mode (Timer 0, 1, 3)

Dual 32-bit general-purpose timer mode (Timer 0, 1, 3)

Watchdog timer mode (Timer 2)

•

Two possible clock sources:

–

Internal clock

External clock/event input via timer input pins (Timer 3)

Three possible operation modes:

–

One-time operation (timer runs for one period then stops)

Continuous operation (timer automatically resets after each period)

Continuous operation with period reload (Timer 3)

•

Generates interrupts to the ARM CPU

Generates sync event to EDMA

Generates output event to device reset (Timer 2)

Generates output event to Real Timer Out (RTO) module (Timer 3)

External event capture via timer input pins (Timer 3)

For more detailed information, see the TMS320DM355 DMSoC 64-bit Timer User's Guide for more

information (SPRUEE5).

5.15.1 Timer Electrical Data/Timing

Table 5-45. Timing Requirements for Timer Input^(1)(2)(3)(see Figure 5-46)

DM355

NO.

UNIT

MIN

MAX

t_c(TIN)

Cycle time, TIM_IN

t_w(TINPH)

t_w(TINPL)

t_t(TIN)

Pulse duration, TIM_IN high

Pulse duration, TIM_IN low

Transition time, TIM_IN

0.45C

0.55C

0.05C

(1) GPIO000, GPIO001, GPIO002, and GPIO003 can be used as external clock inputs for Timer 3. See the TMS320DM355 DMSoC 64-bit

Timer User's Guide for more information (SPRUEE5).

(2) P = MXI1/CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when MXI1/CLKIN frequency is 24 MHz use P = 41.6 ns.

(3) C = TIM_IN cycle time in ns. For example, when TIM_IN frequency is 24 MHz use C = 41.6 ns

TIM_IN

Figure 5-46. Timer Input Timing

144

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.16 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)

The DM355 contains 4 separate Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) modules. The pulse width modulator

(PWM) feature is very common in embedded systems. It provides a way to generate a pulse periodic

waveform for motor control or can act as a digital-to-analog converter with some external components.

This PWM peripheral is basically a timer with a period counter and a first-phase duration comparator,

where bit width of the period and first-phase duration are both programmable. The Pulse Width Modulator

(PWM) modules support the following features:

•

32-bit period counter

32-bit first-phase duration counter

8-bit repeat count for one-shot operation. One-shot operation will produce N + 1 periods of the

waveform, where N is the repeat counter value.

•

Configurable to operate in either one-shot or continuous mode

Buffered period and first-phase duration registers

One-shot operation triggerable by hardware events with programmable edge transitions. (low-to-high or

high-to-low).

•

One-shot operation triggerable by the CCD VSYNC output of the video processing subsystem (VPSS),

which allows any of the PWM instantiations to be used as a CCD timer. This allows the DM355 module

to support the functions provided by the DM320 CCD timer feature (generating strobe and shutter

signals).

•

One-shot operation generates N+1 periods of waveform, N being the repeat count register value

Configurable PWM output pin inactive state

Interrupt and EDMA synchronization events

5.16.1 PWM0/1/2/3 Electrical/Timing Data

Table 5-46. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for PWM0/1/2/3

Outputs⁽¹⁾(see Figure 5-47 and Figure 5-48)

DM355

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

MAX

t_w(PWMH)

t_w(PWML)

Pulse duration, PWMx high

Pulse duration, PWMx low

t_t(PWM)

Transition time, PWMx

.05P

t_d(CCDC-PWMV)

Delay time, CCDC(VD) trigger event to PWMx valid

(1) P = MXI1/CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when MXI1/CLKIN frequency is 24 MHz use P = 41.6 ns.

PWM0/1/2/3

Figure 5-47. PWM Output Timing

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

VD(CCDC)

INVALID

VALID

PWM0

PWM1

INVALID

VALID

INVALID

VALID

PWM2

PWM3

INVALID

VALID

Figure 5-48. PWM Output Delay Timing

146

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.17 Real Time Out (RTO)

The Real Time Out (RTO) peripheral supports the following features:

•

Four separate outputs

Trigger on Timer3 event

5.17.1 RTO Electrical/Timing Data

Table 5-47. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for RTO Outputs (see

Figure 5-49 and Figure 5-50)

DM355

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

MAX

t_w(RTOH)

Pulse duration, RTOx high

t_w(RTOL)

Pulse duration, RTOx low

t_t(RTO)

Transition time, RTOx

.1P

t_{d(TIMER3-RTOV)}

Delay time, Timer 3 (TINT12 or TINT34) trigger event to RTOx valid

RTO0/1/2/3

Figure 5-49. RTO Output Timing

TINT12/TINT34

(Timer3)

RTO0

RTO1

INVALID

VALID

INVALID

VALID

INVALID

VALID

RTO2

RTO3

INVALID

VALID

Figure 5-50. RTO Output Delay Timing

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.18 IEEE 1149.1 JTAG

The JTAG⁽¹⁾interface is used for BSDL testing and emulation of the device.

The device requires that both TRST and RESET be asserted upon power up to be properly initialized.

While RESET initializes the device, TRST initializes the device's emulation logic. Both resets are required

for proper operation.

While both TRST and RESET need to be asserted upon power up, only RESET needs to be released for

the device to boot properly. TRST may be asserted indefinitely for normal operation, keeping the JTAG

port interface and device's emulation logic in the reset state.

TRST only needs to be released when it is necessary to use a JTAG controller to debug the device or

exercise the device's boundary scan functionality. Note: TRST is synchronous and must be clocked by

TCK; otherwise, the boundary scan logic may not respond as expected after TRST is asserted.

RESET must be released only in order for boundary-scan JTAG to read the variant field of IDCODE

correctly. Other boundary-scan instructions work correctly independent of current state of RESET.

For maximum reliability, includes an internal pulldown (PD) on the TRST pin to ensure that TRST will

always be asserted upon power up and the device's internal emulation logic will always be properly

initialized.

JTAG controllers from Texas Instruments actively drive TRST high. However, some third-party JTAG

controllers may not drive TRST high but expect the use of a pullup resistor on TRST.

When using this type of JTAG controller, assert TRST to intialize the device after powerup and externally

drive TRST high before attempting any emulation or boundary scan operations. Following the release of

RESET, the low-to-high transition of TRST must be "seen" to latch the state of EMU1 and EMU0. The

EMU[1:0] pins configure the device for either Boundary Scan mode or Emulation mode. For more detailed

information, see the terminal functions section of this data sheet.

(1) IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard-Test-Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture.

148

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

5.18.1 JTAG Test-Port Electrical Data/Timing

Table 5-48. Timing Requirements for JTAG Test Port (see Figure 5-51)

DM355

MIN MAX

NO.

UNIT

t_c(TCK)

Cycle time, TCK

tw(TCKH)

Pulse duration, TCK high

tw(TCKL)

Pulse duration, TCK low

t_{su(TDIV-RTCKH)}

t_{h(RTCKH-TDIIV)}

t_{su(TMSV-RTCKH)}

t_{h(RTCKH-TMSIV)}

Setup time, TDI valid before RTCK high

Hold time, TDI valid after RTCK high

Setup time, TMS valid before RTCK high

Hold time, TMS valid after RTCK high

TCK

RTCK

TDO

TDI

TMS

Figure 5-51. JTAG Input Timing

Submit Documentation Feedback

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

Table 5-49. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for JTAG Test Port

(see Figure 5-51)

DM355

NO.

PARAMETER

UNIT

MIN

MAX

t_c(RTCK)

Cycle time, RTCK

tw(RTCKH)

Pulse duration, RTCK high

Pulse duration, RTCK low

10 tw(RTCKL)

11 t_{r(all JTAG outputs)}Rise time, all JTAG outputs

12 t_{f(all JTAG outputs)}Fall time, all JTAG outputs

1.3

0.25*tc(RT

CK)

13 t_{d(RTCKL-TDOV)}

Delay time, TCK low to TDO valid

RTCK

TDO

Figure 5-52. JTAG Output Timing

150

Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

6 Revision History

This data sheet revision history highlights the technical changes made to the SPRS463 device-specific

data sheet to make it an SPRS463A revision.

Scope: Updated DM355 Pin Descriptions table, etc.

ADDS/CHANGES/DELETES

Section 1.1, Features:

•

Video Processing Subsystem feature:

14-Bit Parallel AFE (Analog Front End) Interface: Changed speed from 75 MHz to 67.5 MHz

Table 2-1, Characteristics of the Processor:

Corrected the Product Status

–

•

Updated Table 2-3, DM355 ARM Configuration Bus Access to Peripherals

Updated Figure 2-1, Pin Map [Quadrant A]

Updated Figure 2-2, Pin Map [Quadrant B]

Updated Figure 2-3, Pin Map [Quadrant C]

Updated Figure 2-4, Pin Map [Quadrant D]

Table 2-7, Digital Video Terminal Functions:

•

Changed Terminal No. of YOUT7-R7 from "C2" to "C3"

Table 2-9, Asynchronous EMIF/NAND/OneNAND Terminal Functions:

•

Changed Terminal No. of EM_BA0/GIO054/EM_A14 from "T19" to "N19"

H16: Changed Terminal Name from EM_AVD/GIO032 to EM_ADV/GIO032

Table 2-10, DDR Terminal Functions:

•

R11: Changed Terminal Name from DDR_VSSDLL to V_{SSA_DLL}

R10: Changed Terminal Name from DDR_VDDDLL to V_{DDA33_DDRDLL}

Updated Table 2-11, GPIO Terminal Functions

Section 2.4.7, Universal Serial Bus (USB) Interface:

•

Deleted NOTE about OTG supplies not being supported

Updated Table 2-13, USB Terminal Functions

Table 2-17, SPI Terminal Functions:

•

Changed Terminal No. of GIO007/SPI0_SDENA[1] from "B12" to "C17"

Table 2-21, System/Boot Terminal Functions:

Updated all Terminal Names — changed "GOP" to "GIO"

•

Updated Table 2-23, DM355 Pin Descriptions

Section 3.1.1, Components of the ARM Subsystem:

•

Updated the "Video Processing Front End (VPFE)" sub-list

Updated Table 3-7, PLL2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270 (24 MHz reference)

Table 3-9:

•

Changed title from "PLL2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355L (36 MHz reference)" to "PLL2 Supported Clocking

Configurations for DM355-270 (36 MHz reference)"

•

Updated table

Section 3.12.1, Boot Modes Overview:

•

"If BTSEL[1:0] = 01" bulleted item: Changed "Asynchronous EMIF (AEMIF or NOR Flash) boot." to "Asynchronous EMIF (AEMIF)

boot."

Section 4.2, Recommended Operating Conditions:

•

Changed V_{DD_PLL1}to V_{DDA_PLL1}

Changed V_{DD_PLL2}to V_{DDA_PLL2}

Added V_{DDA33_DDRDLL}(Supply voltage, DDR DLL Analog)

Removed V_DDA18(Supply voltage, Analog)

Changed V_{SSA_USB}to V_{SS_USB}

Removed V_SSA(Supply ground, Analog)

Updated descriptions of V_{SS_MX1}and V_{SS_MX2}

Submit Documentation Feedback

Revision History

151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

ADDS/CHANGES/DELETES

Updated Section 5.9.1, Video Processing Front-End (VPFE)

Updated Section 5.9.1.1, CCD Controller (CCDC)

Updated Section 5.9.1.2, IPIPE - Image Pipe

Removed "CFALD – CFA Multiply Mask / Lens Distortion Module" section

Removed "Auto Exposure (AE) and Auto White Balance (AWB) Engine" section

Updated Table 5-17, Timing Requirements for VPFE PCLK Master/Slave Mode

Table 5-21, Timing Requirements for VPBE CLK Inputs:

•

Added footnote

Table 5-24, Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for VPBE Control and Data Output With Respect to VCLK:

Updated "VCLKIN = PCLK or EXTCLK" footnote

•

Updated Section 5.10, USB 2.0

Section 5.18, IEEE 1149.1 JTAG:

•

Removed "Scan Chain" subsection

152

Revision History

Submit Documentation Feedback

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TMS320DM355

Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)

www.ti.com

SPRS463A–SEPTEMBER 2007–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2007

7 Mechanical Data

The following table(s) show the thermal resistance characteristics for the PBGA – ZCE mechanical

package. Note that micro-vias are not required. Contact your TI representative for routing

recommendations.

7.1 Thermal Data for ZCE

The following table shows the thermal resistance characteristics for the PBGA – ZCE mechanical

package.

Table 7-1. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (PBGA Package) [ZCE]

NO.

μC/W

TBD

AIR FLOW (m/s)⁽¹⁾

RΘ_JC

RΘ_JB

RΘ_JA

Psi_JT

Psi_JB

Junction-to-case

TBD

Junction-to-board

Junction-to-free air

Junction-to-package top

Junction-to-board

(1) m/s = meters per second

7.1.1 Packaging Information

The following packaging information and reflect the most current data available for the designated device.

This data is subject to change without notice and without revision of this document. Note that micro-vias

are not required for this package.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Mechanical Data

153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IMPORTANT NOTICE

Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements,

improvements, and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice.

Customers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and

complete. All products are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.

TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in accordance with TI’s

standard warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this

warranty. Except where mandated by government requirements, testing of all parameters of each product is not necessarily

performed.

TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and

applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should

provide adequate design and operating safeguards.

TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right, copyright, mask

work right, or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI products or services

are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license from TI to use such

products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under

the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.

Reproduction of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is

accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction of this information with alteration is an

unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties

may be subject to additional restrictions.

Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that product or service

voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and is an unfair and deceptive business

practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.

TI products are not authorized for use in safety-critical applications (such as life support) where a failure of the TI product would

reasonably be expected to cause severe personal injury or death, unless officers of the parties have executed an agreement

specifically governing such use. Buyers represent that they have all necessary expertise in the safety and regulatory ramifications

of their applications, and acknowledge and agree that they are solely responsible for all legal, regulatory and safety-related

requirements concerning their products and any use of TI products in such safety-critical applications, notwithstanding any

applications-related information or support that may be provided by TI. Further, Buyers must fully indemnify TI and its

representatives against any damages arising out of the use of TI products in such safety-critical applications.

TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments unless the TI products are

specifically designated by TI as military-grade or "enhanced plastic." Only products designated by TI as military-grade meet military

specifications. Buyers acknowledge and agree that any such use of TI products which TI has not designated as military-grade is

solely at the Buyer's risk, and that they are solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in

connection with such use.

TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in automotive applications or environments unless the specific TI products

are designated by TI as compliant with ISO/TS 16949 requirements. Buyers acknowledge and agree that, if they use any

non-designated products in automotive applications, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet such requirements.

Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application solutions:

Products

Amplifiers

Data Converters

DSP

Applications

Audio

amplifier.ti.com

dataconverter.ti.com

dsp.ti.com

www.ti.com/audio

Automotive

Broadband

Digital Control

Military

www.ti.com/automotive

www.ti.com/broadband

www.ti.com/digitalcontrol

www.ti.com/military

Interface

interface.ti.com

logic.ti.com

Logic

Power Mgmt

Microcontrollers

RFID

power.ti.com

Optical Networking

Security

www.ti.com/opticalnetwork

www.ti.com/security

www.ti.com/telephony

www.ti.com/video

microcontroller.ti.com

www.ti-rfid.com

www.ti.com/lpw

Telephony

Low Power

Wireless

Video & Imaging

Wireless

www.ti.com/wireless

Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tektronix Water System 475A User Manual
Toastmaster Toaster T2010CTB User Manual
Tripp Lite Surge Protector TLP712B User Manual
True Fitness Treadmill Z54 User Manual
Uniden Cordless Telephone EXAI3985 User Manual
United States Stove Fan EC95 User Manual
ViewSonic Graphics Tablet VS14359 User Manual
Viking Computer Drive PSFEM1xxxGQxxx User Manual
Vivotek Network Card IP3111 IP3121 User Manual
Vox Camcorder VC 12 User Manual